US20170107563A1 - On-slide staining by primer extension - Google Patents

On-slide staining by primer extension Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20170107563A1
US20170107563A1 US15/317,019 US201515317019A US2017107563A1 US 20170107563 A1 US20170107563 A1 US 20170107563A1 US 201515317019 A US201515317019 A US 201515317019A US 2017107563 A1 US2017107563 A1 US 2017107563A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
strand
nucleotide
oligonucleotide
double
fluorescent
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US15/317,019
Inventor
Nikolay Samusik
Garry P. Nolan
Yury Goltsev
David Robert McIlwain
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Leland Stanford Junior University
Original Assignee
Leland Stanford Junior University
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Leland Stanford Junior University filed Critical Leland Stanford Junior University
Priority to US15/317,019 priority Critical patent/US20170107563A1/en
Assigned to THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF THE LELAND STANFORD JUNIOR reassignment THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF THE LELAND STANFORD JUNIOR ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: GOLTSEV, YURY, MCILWAIN, David Robert, NOLAN, GARRY P., Samusik, Nikolay
Assigned to THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF THE LELAND STANFORD JUNIOR UNIVERSITY reassignment THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF THE LELAND STANFORD JUNIOR UNIVERSITY CORRECTIVE ASSIGNMENT TO CORRECT THE ASSIGNEE NAME PREVIOUSLY RECORDED ON REEL 041489 FRAME 0560. ASSIGNOR(S) HEREBY CONFIRMS THE ASSIGNMENT. Assignors: GOLTSEV, YURY, MCILWAIN, David Robert, NOLAN, GARRY P., Samusik, Nikolay
Publication of US20170107563A1 publication Critical patent/US20170107563A1/en
Assigned to NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (NIH), U.S. DEPT. OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (DHHS), U.S. GOVERNMENT reassignment NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (NIH), U.S. DEPT. OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (DHHS), U.S. GOVERNMENT CONFIRMATORY LICENSE (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: STANFORD UNIVERSITY
Assigned to INNOVATUS LIFE SCIENCES LENDING FUND I, LP reassignment INNOVATUS LIFE SCIENCES LENDING FUND I, LP SECURITY INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: AKOYA BIOSCIENCES, INC.
Priority to US16/679,769 priority patent/US10982263B2/en
Assigned to AKOYA BIOSCIENCES, INC. reassignment AKOYA BIOSCIENCES, INC. RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: INNOVATUS LIFE SCIENCES LENDING FUND I, LP
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6813Hybridisation assays
    • C12Q1/6816Hybridisation assays characterised by the detection means
    • C12Q1/6818Hybridisation assays characterised by the detection means involving interaction of two or more labels, e.g. resonant energy transfer
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6804Nucleic acid analysis using immunogens
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6806Preparing nucleic acids for analysis, e.g. for polymerase chain reaction [PCR] assay

Definitions

  • single-cell antigen cytometry Several major approaches have been used so far for single-cell antigen cytometry. Among the most popular are single cell PCR, fluorescence activated flow cytometry, mass cytometry and single cell sequencing. These (fluorescence and mass-based cytometry) approaches are limited from either inability to breach the multiplexing levels of more than 100 parameters per analyte (cell in this case) or from inability to achieve high throughput (single cell sequencing). Also these methods are not appropriate or readily modified to enable cell multiplexed analysis of archived tissues and slide based samples.
  • a method for analyzing a planar sample may comprise: (a) labeling the planar sample (e.g., a tissue section) with a capture agent (e.g., an antibody or an oligonucleotide probe) in a way that produces a labeled sample in which: (i) the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand; and (ii) the 3′ end or 5′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template; (b) contacting the labeled sample with i. a polymerase and a nucleotide mix and/or ii.
  • a capture agent e.g., an antibody or an oligonucleotide probe
  • a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase thereby adding one or more nucleotides and/or a labeled oligonucleotide to an one of the strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and (c) reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the one or more nucleotides and/or oligonucleotide to one of the strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid using fluorescence microscopy, thereby producing an image showing the pattern of binding of the capture agent to the planar sample.
  • step (b) may contacting the labeled sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises a fluorescent nucleotide, thereby adding the fluorescent nucleotide to one of the strands (i.e., the top strand or the bottom strand, whichever strand has the extendible 3′ end) of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and step (c) may comprise reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotide to one of the strands (i.e., the top strand or the bottom strand, whichever strand has the extendible 3′ end) of the double-stranded nucleic acid.
  • the fluorescent signal may: i. emitted directly from the added nucleotide; ii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two fluorescent nucleotides that are added to a 3′ end of one of the strands; or iii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between a first added fluorescent nucleotide (i.e., a fluorescent nucleotide that has been added to one of the strands) and a second fluorescent nucleotide that is already present in one of the strands.
  • a first added fluorescent nucleotide i.e., a fluorescent nucleotide that has been added to one of the strands
  • a second fluorescent nucleotide that is already present in one of the strands.
  • step (b) comprises contacting the labeled sample with a ligase and a labeled oligonucleotide, thereby adding the labeled oligonucleotide to the 3′ or 5′ end of one of the strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and step (c) comprises reading a fluorescent signal generated by ligation of the labeled oligonucleotide to one of the strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid.
  • an extendible 3′ end may be extended by a polymerase, and ligated to a labeled oligonucleotide.
  • the fluorescent signal may be: i.
  • a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two fluorescent nucleotides that are added to one of the strands; or iii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between a first fluorescent nucleotide added one of the strands and a second fluorescent nucleotide that is already present in the other strand.
  • extension of one of the strands removes a quencher from a quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the other strand, downstream from the first strand.
  • the first strand is a rolling circle amplification (RCA) product
  • the second strand comprises oligonucleotides that are hybridized to multiple sites in the RCA product.
  • RCA rolling circle amplification
  • the first strand is an oligonucleotide
  • the second strand is a second oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the first oligonucleotide.
  • the oligonucleotides may be designed to produce a 5′ overhang such that the 3′ end of the first strand oligonucleotide is extendible using the other oligonucleotide as a template.
  • the oligonucleotides may be designed to produce a 3′ overhang such that the 5′ end of the first strand oligonucleotide is extendible by ligation, using the other oligonucleotide as a template
  • the planar sample may be a tissue section, e.g., a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue section.
  • FFPE paraffin-embedded
  • a capture agent that is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid, wherein: (i) the double-stranded nucleic acid comprises a first strand and a second strand; (ii) the capture agent is linked to the first strand; and (iii) the 3′ end or 5′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template.
  • a capture agent composition comprising a plurality of capture agents that recognize different complementary sites, wherein: each of the capture agents is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand; the capture agents are linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid by the first strand; the 3′ end or 5′ end of the first or second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template; and the templates immediately downstream of the extendible ends are different for each of the capture agents.
  • the sequence of the first strand is the same for each of the capture agents; and the sequence of the second strand is different for each of the capture agents.
  • the templates immediately adjacent to the template at the extendible 3′ end may be of the formula 3′-N 4n N 1 /N 2 /N 3 -5′ optionally followed by short stretch (e.g., 1-5 residues) of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, where N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 0, 1 or more.
  • the population contains single nucleotide overhangs of nucleotides N 1 , N 2 and N 3 or the population of overhangs comprises two nucleotide overhangs of sequence 3′-N 1 N 1 -5′, 3′-N 4 N 2 -5′ and 3′-N 4 N 3 -5′-5′ and, optionally overhangs of sequence, 3′-N 4 N 4 N 1 -5′, 3′-N 4 N 4 N 2 -5′ and 3′-N 4 N 4 N 3 -5′ and so on (e.g., four nucleotide overhangs of sequence 3′-N 4 N 4 N 4 N 1 -5′, 3′-N 4 N 4 N 4 N 2 -5′ and 3′-N 4 N 4 N 3 -5′).
  • a population of oligonucleotides or RCA products having sequences that are defined by any of these formulas is also provided. In RCA embodiments, the sequence may be found in each repeat of an RCA product.
  • the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end may be of a more general formula 3′-XN 1 /N 2 /N 3 -5′, where N 1 , N 2 , N 3 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and X is a nucleotide stretch of bases Xi (such that Xi are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C) of random composition and length.
  • the population may comprise comprises two nucleotide overhangs of sequence 3′-X 1 N 1 -5′, 3′-X 1 N 2 -5′ and 3′-X 1 N 3 -5′ and, optionally overhangs of sequence, 3′-N 1 X 1 X 2 -5′, 3′-N 2 X 1 X 2 -5′ and 3′-N 3 X 1 X 2 -5′ and so on (e.g., four nucleotide overhangs of sequence 3′-N 1 X 1 X 2 X 3 -5′, 3′-N 2 X 1 X 2 X 3 -5′ and 3′-N 3 X 1 X 2 X 3 -5′).
  • this population additionally contains single nucleotide overhangs of nucleotides N 1 , N 2 and N 3 .
  • a population of oligonucleotides or RCA products having sequences that are defined by any of these formulas is also provided. In RCA embodiments, the sequence may be found in each repeat of an RCA product.
  • the template immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end may be of the formula 3′-YN 1 /N 2 -5′, optionally followed by short stretch (e.g., 1-5 residues) of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of bases N 3 and N 4 , wherein nucleotide N 3 is in odd positions and nucleotide N 4 is in even positions, counting from the start of the overhang and N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • the population may comprise 5′ overhangs of sequence 3′-N 1 -5′ and 3′-N 2 -5′ or optionally 3′-N 3 N 1 -5′ and 3′-N 3 N 2 -5′ or 3′-N 3 N 4 N 1 -5′ and 3′-N 3 N 4 N 2 -5′ and, optionally, overhangs of sequence 3′-N 3 N 4 N 3 N 1 -5′ and 3′-N 3 N 4 N 3 N 2 -5′ and so on (e.g., overhangs of sequence 3′-N 3 N 4 N 3 N 4 N 1 -5′ and 3′-N 3 N 4 N 3 N 4 N 2 -5′ and then 3′-N 3 N 4 N 3 N 4 N 3 N 1 -5′ and 3′-N 3 N 4 N 3 N 2 -5′).
  • a population of oligonucleotides or RCA products having sequences that are defined by any of these formulas is also provided. In RCA embodiments, the sequence may be found in each
  • the template immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end may also be of a more general formula 3′-YN 1 /N 2 -5′, wherein Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of alternating random length stretches of bases N 3 and N 4 such that the order number of N 3 — stretches is odd and of N 4 stretches is even and wherein N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • the population may comprise overhangs of sequence 3′-N 1 -5′ and 3′-N 2 -5′ or optionally 3′-N 3 N 3 N 1 -5′ and 3′-N 3 N 3 N 2 -5′ or 3′-N 3 N 3 N 4 N 1 -5′ and 3′-N 3 N 3 N 4 N 2 -5′ and, optionally, overhangs of sequence 3′-N 3 N 3 N 3 N 3 N 4 N 4 N 3 N 3 N 3 N 1 -5′ and 3′-N 3 N 3 N 3 N 3 N 4 N 4 N 3 N 3 N-5′ and so on).
  • a population of oligonucleotides or RCA products having sequences that are defined by any of these formulas is also provided. In RCA embodiments, the sequence may be found in each repeat of an RCA product.
  • a method for analyzing a tissue sample may comprise (a) labeling a planar sample with the above-described capture agent composition; (b) contacting the labeled sample with i. a polymerase and either an incomplete nucleotide mix or a nucleotide mix that comprises a reversible terminator nucleotide and/or ii. a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase; and (c) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition a nucleotide or a labeled oligonucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents.
  • the method may comprises: (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and: (i) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , N 2 and N 3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 or (ii) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , and N 2 , an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N 3 , and no nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 , thereby adding fluorescent nucleotides onto the double-stranded nucleic acids of some but not all of the capture agents; and (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition of a fluorescent nucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents.
  • the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end are of the formula 3′-N 4n N 1 /N 2 /N 3 , wherein N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more; and step (c) comprises contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , N 2 and N 3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 .
  • this method may further comprise: (e) inactivating the fluorescent signal, deprotecting the reversible terminator nucleotide and blocking the sample; and (f) repeating steps (c) and (d).
  • step (f) may comprise repeating steps (c), (d) and (e) multiple times.
  • the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end may be of the formula 3′-YN 1 /N 2 -5′, optionally followed by short stretch (e.g., 1-5 nucleotides) of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of bases N 3 and N 4 , and wherein N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • short stretch e.g., 1-5 nucleotides
  • the method may comprise (e) inactivating the fluorescent signal and contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 ; and (f) repeating steps (c) and (d).
  • step (f) may comprise repeating steps (c), (d) and (e) multiple times.
  • the double-stranded oligonucleotides may each comprise a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide hybridized to the second strand downstream from first strand, wherein the fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide comprises a quencher and extension of the first strand removes the quencher from some but not all of the quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some but not all of the capture agents.
  • the capture agent is linked to a single stranded oligonucleotide, which can be either unlabeled or labeled with FRET acceptor fluorophore.
  • a single stranded nucleotide incorporates a dedicated sequence that hybridizes to a complementary oligonucleotide which is to be extended with unlabeled base or with a base labeled with a FRET excitation fluorophore, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some but not all of the capture agents.
  • a method for analyzing a planar sample comprises: (a) labeling the planar sample with a capture agent to produce a labeled sample, wherein: (i) the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand; and (ii) a 3′ end or 5′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template; (b) contacting the labeled sample with i. a polymerase and a plurality of nucleotides and/or ii.
  • the method may further comprise producing an image showing the pattern of binding of the capture agent to the planar sample.
  • step (b) may comprise contacting the labeled sample with a polymerase and a plurality of nucleotides that comprises a fluorescent nucleotide, thereby adding the fluorescent nucleotide to one of the first strand or the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and step (c) comprises reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotide to one of the first strand or the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid.
  • the fluorescent signal may be: i. emitted directly from the added nucleotide; ii.
  • a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two fluorescent nucleotides of the plurality of flourescent nucleotides that are added to one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid; or iii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between the added fluorescent nucleotide and a second fluorescent nucleotide that is present in one of the first strand or second strand double-stranded nucleic acid.
  • the method step (b) may comprise contacting the labeled sample with a ligase and a labeled oligonucleotide, thereby adding the labeled oligonucleotide to one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and step (c) comprises reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the labeled oligonucleotide to one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid.
  • the fluorescent signal may be: i. emitted directly from the added labeled nucleotide; ii.
  • the labeled nucleotide may comprise a fluorescent nucleotide.
  • extension of one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid may remove a quencher from a quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the other strand, downstream from the first strand.
  • the first strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid may be a rolling circle amplification (RCA) product
  • the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid comprises oligonucleotides that are hybridized to multiple sites in the RCA product.
  • the first strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid may be a first oligonucleotide
  • the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid is a second oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the first oligonucleotide
  • planar sample may be a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded (FFPE) section.
  • FFPE formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded
  • the capture agent may be an antibody, an aptamer, or an oligonucleotide probe.
  • a capture agent that is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid is also provided.
  • the double-stranded nucleic acid comprises a first strand and a second strand;
  • the capture agent is linked to the first strand; and
  • the 5′ end or the 3′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template.
  • each of the plurality of capture agents may be linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand; the 5′ end or 3′ end of the first or second strand may be extendible using the other strand as a template; and the templates immediately downstream of the extendible ends may be different for each of the plurality of capture agents.
  • the sequence of the first strand may be the same for each of the plurality of capture agents; and the sequence of the second strand may be different for each of the plurality of capture agents.
  • the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ ends may be of the formula 3′-N 4n N 1 /N 2 /N 3 , wherein N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more.
  • the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ ends may be of the formula 3′-YN 1 /N 2 -5′, optionally followed by a short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of N 3 and N 4 , and wherein N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • a method for analyzing a planar sample may comprise (a) labeling the planar sample with a capture agent composition summarized above; (b) contacting the labeled sample with i. a polymerase and either an incomplete nucleotide mix or a nucleotide mix that comprises a reversible terminator nucleotide, thereby adding a nucleotide to the plurality of capture agents; and/or ii.
  • the signal may be a fluorescent signal.
  • the reading may be done by fluorescent microscopy.
  • the method may be done by (b) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and: (i) a nucleotide mix that comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , N 2 and N 3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 ; or (ii) a nucleotide mix that comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , and N 2 , an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N 3 , and no nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 , thereby adding fluorescent nucleotides onto the double-stranded nucleic acids of some but not all of the plurality of capture agents; and (c) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotides to the double-stranded nucleic acids of some but not all of the plurality of capture agents.
  • the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end may be of the formula 3′-N 4n N 1 /N 2 /N 3 , wherein N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more; and step (b) comprises contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , N 2 and N 3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 .
  • the method may further comprise: (d) inactivating the fluorescent signal, (e) optionally, deprotecting the reversible terminator nucleotide; (f) blocking the sample; and (g) repeating steps (b) and (c).
  • step (g) may comprise repeating steps (b)-(f) multiple times.
  • the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end may be of the formula 3′-YN 1 /N 2 -5′, optionally followed by a short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of N 3 and N 4 , and wherein N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • the method may further comprise: (d) inactivating the fluorescent signal; (e) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 ; and (f) repeating steps (b) and (c). In some cases, step (f) may comprise repeating steps (b)-(e) multiple times.
  • the double-stranded nucleic acids each comprise a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide hybridized to the second strand downstream from the first strand, wherein the fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide comprises a quencher and extension of the first strand removes the quencher from some but not all of the quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some but not all of the plurality of capture agents.
  • extension of the double-stranded nucleic acid comprises contacting the planar sample with a mixture of labeled and unlabeled oligonucleotides and a ligase.
  • the plurality of capture agents may be selected from the group consisting of: antibodies, aptamers, and oligonucleotide probes.
  • kits may comprise: (a) one or more capture agents, wherein the one or more capture agents can specifically bind to complementary sites in a planar sample. (b) one or more double-stranded nucleic acids comprising a first strand a second strand, wherein each of the one or more capture agents is linked to the double-stranded nucleic acid, and wherein a 5′ end or 3′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template.
  • the kit may further comprise a polymerase or ligase.
  • the kit may further comprise a nucleotide mix comprising at least one of a fluorescent nucleotide, an unlabeled nucleotide, and a reversible terminator nucleotide.
  • the one or more capture agents may be selected from the group consisting of: an antibody, an aptamer and an oligonucleotide probe.
  • a method for analyzing a planar sample.
  • the method comprises incubating the planar sample with a capture agent under conditions by which the capture agent specifically binds to complementary sites in the planar sample.
  • the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide that comprises a first strand and a second strand.
  • a 3′ end of the first strand is recessed relative to a 5′ end of the second strand, thereby producing an overhang.
  • the method comprises contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a plurality of nucleotides, thereby adding one or more nucleotides of the plurality of nucleotides to the overhang.
  • the method comprises reading a signal generated by addition of the one or more nucleotides to the overhang.
  • the plurality of nucleotides comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides.
  • a fluorescent nucleotide of the plurality of nucleotides is added to the overhang.
  • the signal comprises a fluorescent signal.
  • the fluorescent signal is emitted directly from the fluorescent nucleotide added to the overhang.
  • two of the plurality of fluorescent nucleotides are added to the overhang.
  • the fluorescent signal is a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between the two of the plurality of fluorescent nucleotides added to the overhang.
  • the fluorescent signal is a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between the fluorescent nucleotide from the plurality of fluorescent nucleotides added to the overhang and a fluorescent nucleotide that is present in the second strand.
  • extension of the first strand removes a quencher from a quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the second strand, downstream from the first strand.
  • the planar sample is a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded (FFPE) section.
  • the capture agent is linked to the double-stranded oligonucleotide by a 5′ end of the first strand.
  • the capture agent is linked to the double-stranded oligonucleotide by a 3′ end of the second strand.
  • the method further comprises crosslinking the capture agent to the planar sample.
  • the reading comprises fluorescence microscopy.
  • the method further comprises producing an image showing a pattern of binding of the capture agent to the planar sample.
  • the one or more nucleotides of the plurality of nucleotides is added to the overhang by primer extension.
  • the capture agent is an antibody, an aptamer or an oligonucleotide probe.
  • a composition comprising a plurality of capture agents that specifically bind to different complementary sites in a planar sample.
  • each of the plurality of capture agents is linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide that comprises a first strand and a second strand.
  • a 3′ end of the first strand in each of the double-stranded oligonucleotides is recessed relative to a 5′ end of the second strand, thereby producing an overhang.
  • the overhang is different for each of the plurality of capture agents.
  • each of the plurality of capture agents is linked to the double-stranded oligonucleotide by a 5′ end of the first strand.
  • each of the plurality of capture agents is linked to the double-stranded oligonucleotide by a 3′ end of the second strand.
  • a sequence of the first strand is the same for each of the plurality of capture agents and a sequence of the second strand is different for each of the plurality of capture agents.
  • the overhang is of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more.
  • the overhang is of the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by a short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end of the first strand to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of N3 and N4, and wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n and wherein n is 0, 1, or more.
  • the order number of N3 stretches is odd and wherein the order number of N4 stretches is even.
  • the planar sample is a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded section (FFPE).
  • the plurality of capture agents are antibodies, aptamers, or oligonucleotide probes.
  • a method for analyzing a planar sample.
  • the method comprises incubating the planar sample with the composition described above under conditions by which each of the plurality of capture agents specifically bind to different complementary sites in the planar sample.
  • the method comprises contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a plurality of nucleotides, thereby adding one or more nucleotides of the plurality of nucleotides to the overhang of some, but not all, of the plurality of capture agents.
  • the method comprises reading a signal generated by addition of the one or more nucleotides from the plurality of nucleotides to the overhang of some, but not all, of the plurality of capture agents.
  • the method further comprises crosslinking the plurality of capture agents to the planar sample.
  • the plurality of nucleotides comprises an incomplete nucleotide mix or a nucleotide mix comprising a reversible terminator nucleotide.
  • the signal comprises a fluorescent signal.
  • the reading comprises fluorescence microscopy.
  • the method further comprises producing an image showing a pattern of binding of the plurality of capture agents to the planar sample.
  • the plurality of nucleotides comprises: (i) a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3, and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4; or (ii) a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1 and N2, an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N3, and no nucleotide that is complementary to N4.
  • a fluorescent nucleotide of the plurality of fluorescent nucleotides is added to the overhang of some, but not all, of the plurality of capture agents.
  • the signal comprises a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotide of the plurality of fluorescent nucleotides to some, but not all, of the plurality of capture agents.
  • the reading comprises fluorescence microscopy.
  • the method further comprises producing an image showing the pattern of binding of the plurality of capture agents to the planar sample.
  • the overhangs are of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more, and wherein the plurality of nucleotides comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2, N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4.
  • the method further comprises inactivating the fluorescent signal, optionally, deprotecting the reversible terminator nucleotide; blocking the planar sample; and repeating the steps of contacting and reading.
  • the repeating further comprises repeating the steps of contacting, reading, inactivating, optionally deprotecting, and blocking a plurality of times.
  • the overhangs are of the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by a short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end of the first strand to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of N3 and N4, and wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n and wherein n is 0, 1, or more.
  • the method further comprises inactivating the fluorescent signal, contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N4; and repeating the steps of contacting and reading. In some cases, the repeating comprises repeating the steps of contacting, reading, inactivating, and contacting a plurality of times.
  • each of the double-stranded oligonucleotides comprise a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide hybridized to the second strand downstream from the first strand, wherein the fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide comprises a quencher and extension of the first strand removes the quencher from some, but not all, of the quenched fluorescently-labeled oligonucleotides, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some, but not all, of the capture agents.
  • FIG. 1A-1B (A) schematically illustrates a detection reagent composed of a combination of a capture agent that is conjugated to a double-stranded oligonucleotide. Upon detection and removal of unbound detection reagent the binding pattern is rendered by polymerase driven primer extension.
  • Panel (B) schematically illustrates three approaches for linking the capture agent (an antibody in this case, but not excluding other possible capture agents) to a double stranded oligonucleotide (i.e., by chemical conjugation of the upper strand oligonucleotide to the capture agent; using streptavidin as an intermediate to connect biotinylated antibody and biotinylated oligonucleotide; and by linking biotinylated oligonucleotide to antibody chemically conjugated to streptavidin).
  • the capture agent an antibody in this case, but not excluding other possible capture agents
  • FIG. 2 schematically illustrates examples of capture agents that are bound to double-stranded oligonucleotides that have different overhangs. Such different overhangs represent a strategy to increase signal harvested from a particular capture agent by multiplication of positions in lower strand oligonucleotide complementary to detector base (dU in this case).
  • the lower panel also shows how a different base labeled with a different fluorophore can be used as a FRET excitation pair for the “Detector” base.
  • SEQ ID NOS: 1-4 SEQ ID NOS: 1-4.
  • FIG. 3 schematically illustrates several cycles of a multiplexed detection method that relies on reversible dye terminators.
  • FIG. 4 schematically illustrates several cycles of a multiplexed detection method that relies on leaving out one of the four nucleotides per cycle.
  • FIG. 5A-5D schematically illustrates an exemplary design of oligonucleotide duplexes for “reversible terminator” and “missing base” multiplexing methods.
  • FIG. 6 schematically illustrates an exemplary design of oligonucleotide duplexes for a strategy that allows one to reduce the length of the lower strand oligonucleotide, creating an overhang in the case of highly multiplexed capture agent panels.
  • FIG. 7 schematically illustrates an example of a detection method that relies on removing a quencher from a labeled oligonucleotide by nick translation.
  • SEQ ID NOS: 31-35 SEQ ID NOS: 31-35.
  • FIG. 8 schematically illustrates a multiplexed detection method that relies on removing quenchers from labeled oligonucleotides.
  • Step 1 SEQ ID NOS 36-44
  • Step 2 SEQ ID NOS: 45-52
  • Step 3 SEQ ID NOS: 53-60
  • Step 4 SEQ ID NOS: 61-67.
  • FIGS. 9A and 9B schematically illustrate an embodiment that relies on cyclical re-annealing of polymerase priming nucleotides and a variant of the same approach that utilizes FRET.
  • SEQ ID NOS: 68-80 schematically illustrate an embodiment that relies on cyclical re-annealing of polymerase priming nucleotides and a variant of the same approach that utilizes FRET.
  • FIG. 10 schematically illustrates an embodiment that relies on cyclical re-annealing of polymerase priming nucleotides and a variant of the same approach that utilizes FRET.
  • FIGS. 11A-11C shows an anti-CD4 antibody linked to oligonucleotide duplex designed for rendering staining by primer extension (panel A) and data obtained from labeled population of spleen cells in suspension in the absence of polymerase (panel B) and in the presence of polymerase (panel C).
  • panel A primer extension
  • panel B data obtained from labeled population of spleen cells in suspension in the absence of polymerase
  • panel C panel C
  • SEQ ID NOS: 87 and 88 SEQ ID NOS: 87 and 88.
  • FIGS. 12A-12D shows data obtained from labeling by primer extension a population of spleen cells preattached on the slide. Cells were co-stained with “regular” TCRb-FITC antibody and CD4 antibody linked to oligonucleotide duplex designed for rendering staining by primer extension.
  • FIGS. 13A-13D show schematic illustration of two capture agents CD4 and CD8 linked to oligonucleotide duplexes (panel A) and data obtained from a multiplexed method whereby staining by this capture agents was sequentially detected on spleen cells smeared on a slide using a “reversible terminator” method (panels C-D).
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of an experiment testing multiplexed staining by “missing base” approach.
  • Mouse spleen samples were barcoded by pan-leukocytic CD45 antibody conjugated to per sample specific oligonucleotide duplexes. Samples were mixed after staining and mixture was resolved by sequential rendering of CD45-oligonucleotide variants.
  • FIG. 15 is 12 panels of images showing the first 6 cycles of rendering the 30 populations barcoded by CD45 (as per scheme on FIG. 14 ). Two populations were co-detected per cycle of rendering. In each cycle control image was acquired after fluorescence inactivation.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates enhanced antibody signal with rolling circle amplification.
  • A. Antibody-DNA conjugate that consists of an antibody, a covalently linked linear linker oligonucleotide and a 5′-phosphorylated padlock nucleotide is used to stain the cellular antigens.
  • Padlock probe contains the detection primer sequence (orange) followed by the fluorescent nucleotide incorporation site (T).
  • B. Padlock oligonucleotide is treated with T4 DNA ligase, inducing its circularization.
  • C. Rolling circle amplification with strand-displacing phi29 DNA polymerase created repeats of the reverse-complement of the detection primer sites (green).
  • FIG. 17 shows fluorescent images of cells, showing the staining of 22 different antigens rendered by the iterative primer extension protocol.
  • one antigen-antibody-DNA complex incorporates dUTP-SS-Cy5 fluorophore (red) and one complex incorporates dCTP-SS-Cy3 (green), all other complexes receive an unlabelled ‘walking’ base (dGTP on odd cycles, dATP on even cycles).
  • FIG. 18 shows A: multipanel design whereby antibody-DNA conjugates are incapable of polymerase extension because of 3′-dideoxy-terminator bases, but each panel can be activated for extension independently of others by an addition of a panel-specific primer.
  • B 18 aliquotes of mouse spleen cells were independently stained with different CD45 antibody conjugates that were designed such. Aliquots 1-3 (panel 1) can be detected by regular ABseq primer extension (top row), aliquots 4-6 (panel 2) were be extended after addition of Spacer1 oligonucleotide primer and aliquotes 7-9 (panel 3) can be extended after addition of Spacer2 oligonucleotide primer.
  • C Results of image quantification.
  • Intensities of individual cell intensities displayed as a barcodes one cell for each row, red color representing higher staining intensity.
  • Columns represent intensities of cells on each extension cycle.
  • the diagonal pattern shows the high specificity of spacer-based extension and the absence of signal cross-talk between panels and extension cycles.
  • FIG. 19 shows A: A pair of coincidence detection probes is hybridized to the target RNA.
  • Upstream oligonucleotide probe (Splint-primer) serves as a splint for circularization and ligation of the downstream oligonucleotide probe (padlock).
  • Padlock probe contains a detection primer sequence (lilac) followed by the fluorescent nucleotide incorporation site (red)
  • Rolling circle amplification is initiated at the 3′ end of the upstream probe and creates multiple copies of the reverse-complement of detection primer sequence (lilac).
  • C. Detection primer is annealed to the multiple sites of the amplification product.
  • E-F small and bright puncta in NALM cells correspond to single HLADRA RNA molecules, which are absent in the negative control Jurkat cells. Large red blobs present in both panels correspond to apoptotic cells that nonspecifically bind the fluorescent nucleotide.
  • FIG. 20 shows an alternative method that relies on primer extension and the ligation of a short, labeled oligonucleotide.
  • FIG. 21 depicts a system to enable a user to detect, analyze, and process images of samples.
  • nucleic acids are written left to right in 5′ to 3′ orientation; amino acid sequences are written left to right in amino to carboxy orientation, respectively.
  • biological feature of interest refers to any part of a cell that can be indicated by binding to a capture agent.
  • exemplary biological features of interest include cell walls, nuclei, cytoplasm, membrane, keratin, muscle fibers, collagen, bone, proteins, nucleic acid (e.g., mRNA or genomic DNA, etc). fat, etc.
  • a biological feature of interest can also be indicated by immunohistological methods, e.g., a capture agent that is linked to an oligonucleotide. In these embodiments, the capture agent binds to an site, e.g., a protein epitope, in the sample.
  • Exemplary epitopes include, but are not limited to carcinoembryonic antigen (for identification of adenocarcinomas, cytokeratins (for identification of carcinomas but may also be expressed in some sarcomas) CD15 and CD30 (for Hodgkin's disease), alpha fetoprotein (for yolk sac tumors and hepatocellular carcinoma), CD117 (for gastrointestinal stromal tumors), CD10 (for renal cell carcinoma and acute lymphoblastic leukemia), prostate specific antigen (for prostate cancer), estrogens and progesterone (for tumour identification), CD20 (for identification of B-cell lymphomas), CD3 (for identification of T-cell lymphomas).
  • Complementary nucleic acid molecules e.g., DNA and/or RNA
  • in the sample provide binding complementary sites for oligonucleotide probes.
  • multiplexing refers to using more than one label for the simultaneous or sequential detection and measurement of biologically active material.
  • antibody and “immunoglobulin” are used interchangeably herein and are well understood by those in the field. Those terms refer to a protein consisting of one or more polypeptides that specifically binds an antigen.
  • One form of antibody constitutes the basic structural unit of an antibody. This form is a tetramer and consists of two identical pairs of antibody chains, each pair having one light and one heavy chain. In each pair, the light and heavy chain variable regions are together responsible for binding to an antigen, and the constant regions are responsible for the antibody effector functions.
  • the recognized immunoglobulin polypeptides include the kappa and lambda light chains and the alpha, gamma (IgG 1 , IgG 2 , IgG 3 , IgG 4 ), delta, epsilon and mu heavy chains or equivalents in other species.
  • Full-length immunoglobulin “light chains” (of about 25 kDa or about 214 amino acids) comprise a variable region of about 110 amino acids at the NH 2 -terminus and a kappa or lambda constant region at the COOH-terminus.
  • Full-length immunoglobulin “heavy chains” (of about 50 kDa or about 446 amino acids), similarly comprise a variable region (of about 116 amino acids) and one of the aforementioned heavy chain constant regions, e.g., gamma (of about 330 amino acids).
  • antibodies and immunoglobulin include antibodies or immunoglobulins of any isotype, fragments of antibodies which retain specific binding to antigen, including, but not limited to, Fab, Fv, scFv, and Fd fragments, chimeric antibodies, humanized antibodies, minibodies, single-chain antibodies, and fusion proteins comprising an antigen-binding portion of an antibody and a non-antibody protein. Also encompassed by the term are Fab′, Fv, F(ab′) 2 , and or other antibody fragments that retain specific binding to antigen, and monoclonal antibodies.
  • Antibodies may exist in a variety of other forms including, for example, Fv, Fab, and (Fab′) 2 , as well as bi-functional (i.e. bi-specific) hybrid antibodies (e.g., Lanzavecchia et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 17, 105 (1987)) and in single chains (e.g., Huston et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 85, 5879-5883 (1988) and Bird et al., Science, 242, 423-426 (1988), which are incorporated herein by reference).
  • Hood et al. “Immunology”, Benjamin, N.Y., 2nd ed. (1984), and Hunkapiller and Hood, Nature, 323, 15-16 (1986),).
  • binding refers to the ability of a binding reagent to preferentially bind to a particular analyte that is present in a homogeneous mixture of different analytes. In certain embodiments, a specific binding interaction will discriminate between desirable and undesirable analytes in a sample, in some embodiments more than about 10 to 100-fold or more (e.g., more than about 1000- or 10,000-fold).
  • the affinity between a binding reagent and analyte when they are specifically bound in a capture agent/analyte complex is characterized by a K D (dissociation constant) of less than 10 ⁇ 6 M, less than 10 ⁇ 7 M, less than 10 ⁇ 8 M, less than 10 ⁇ 9 M, less than 10 ⁇ 9 M, less than 10 ⁇ 11 M, or less than about 10 ⁇ 12 M or less.
  • a “plurality” contains at least 2 members. In certain cases, a plurality may have at least 2, at least 5, at least 10, at least 100, at least 1000, at least 10,000, at least 100,000, at least 10 6 , at least 10 7 , at least 10 8 or at least 10 9 or more members.
  • labeling refers to attaching a detectable fluorophore to specific sites in a sample (e.g., sites containing an epitope for the antibody being used, for example) such that the presence and/or abundance of the sites can be determined by evaluating the presence and/or abundance of the label.
  • the term “labelling” refers to a method for producing a labeled sample in which any necessary steps are performed in any convenient order, as long as the required labeled sample is produced.
  • the capture agent may be already linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid prior to binding of the antibody to the sample, in which case a sample can be labeled using relatively few steps.
  • the capture agent may be linked to the first strand of the double stranded nucleic acid at the time at which it is incubated with the sample.
  • the second strand of the double stranded nucleic acid may be hybridized to the first strand of the double stranded nucleic acid after the antibody has bound to the sample.
  • the capture agent may be linked to a rolling circle amplification (RCA) primer at the time at which it is incubated with the sample.
  • the double-stranded nucleic acid may be produced by: a) hybridizing the sample with a padlock probe having ends that are complementary to the RCA primer, ligating the ends of the padlock probes together, and copying the padlock probe by rolling circle amplification and b) hybridizing an oligonucleotide to the RCA product, as illustrated in FIG. 16 .
  • the RCA product is the first strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid
  • the oligonucleotides that are hybridized to the RCA product are the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid.
  • the labeling step may comprise crosslinking the capture agent to the planar sample so that subsequence manipulations can be done without the capture agent disassociating from its complementary sites in the planar sample.
  • the crosslinking step may be done immediately after binding of the antibody to the sample.
  • the sample may be cross-linked after binding of the antibody to is the sample, and the double-stranded may be produced after crosslinking.
  • planar sample refers to a substantially planar, i.e., two dimensional, material (e.g. glass, metal, ceramics, organic polymer surface or gel) that contains cells or any combinations of biomolecules derived from cells, such as proteins, nucleic acids, lipids, oligo/polysachharides, biomolecule complexes, cellular organels, cellular debris or excretions (exosomes, microvesicles).
  • a substantially planar i.e., two dimensional, material (e.g. glass, metal, ceramics, organic polymer surface or gel) that contains cells or any combinations of biomolecules derived from cells, such as proteins, nucleic acids, lipids, oligo/polysachharides, biomolecule complexes, cellular organels, cellular debris or excretions (exosomes, microvesicles).
  • a planar cellular sample can be made by, e.g., growing cells on a planar surface, depositing cells on a planar surface, e.g., by centrifugation, by cutting a three dimensional object that contains cells into sections and mounting the sections onto a planar surface, i.e., producing a tissue section, absorbing the cellular components onto the surface that is functionalized with affinity agents (e.g. antibodies, haptens, nucleic acid probes), introducing the biomolecules into a polymer gel or transferring them onto a polymer surface electrophoretically or by other means.
  • affinity agents e.g. antibodies, haptens, nucleic acid probes
  • the cells or biomolecules may be fixed using any number of reagents including formalin, methanol, paraformaldehyde, methanol:acetic acid, glutaraldehyde, bifunctional crosslinkers such as bis(succinimidyl)suberate, bis(succinimidyl)polyethyleneglycole etc.
  • This definition is intended to cover cellular samples (e.g., tissue sections, etc), electrophoresis gels and blots thereof, Western blots, dot-blots, ELISAs, antibody microarrays, nucleic acid microarrays etc.
  • tissue section refers to a piece of tissue that has been obtained from a subject, fixed, sectioned, and mounted on a planar surface, e.g., a microscope slide.
  • FFPE tissue section refers to a piece of tissue, e.g., a biopsy that has been obtained from a subject, fixed in formaldehyde (e.g., 3%-5% formaldehyde in phosphate buffered saline) or Bouin solution, embedded in wax, cut into thin sections, and then mounted on a microscope slide.
  • formaldehyde e.g., 3%-5% formaldehyde in phosphate buffered saline
  • Bouin solution embedded in wax
  • spatialally-addressable measurements refers to a set of values that are each associated with a specific position on a surface. Spatially-addressable measurements can be mapped to a position in a sample and can be used to reconstruct an image of the sample.
  • a “diagnostic marker” is a specific biochemical in the body which has a particular molecular feature that makes it useful for detecting a disease, measuring the progress of disease or the effects of treatment, or for measuring a process of interest.
  • a “pathoindicative” cell is a cell which, when present in a tissue, indicates that the animal in which the tissue is located (or from which the tissue was obtained) is afflicted with a disease or disorder.
  • the presence of one or more breast cells in a lung tissue of an animal is an indication that the animal is afflicted with metastatic breast cancer.
  • complementary site is used to refer to an epitope for an antibody or aptamer, or a nucleic acid molecule if the capture agent is an oligonucleotide probe.
  • the capture agent is an antibody
  • the complementary site for the capture agent is the epitope in the sample to which the antibody binds.
  • the capture agent is an oligonucleotide probe
  • the complementary site for the capture agent is a complementary sequence in a DNA or RNA molecule in the sample.
  • epitope as used herein is defined as small chemical groups on the antigen molecule that is bound to by an antibody.
  • An antigen can have one or more epitopes. In many cases, an epitope is roughly five amino acids or sugars in size.
  • an epitope is roughly five amino acids or sugars in size.
  • One skilled in the art understands that generally the overall three-dimensional structure or the specific linear sequence of the molecule can be the main criterion of antigenic specificity.
  • a “subject” of diagnosis or treatment is a plant or animal, including a human.
  • Non-human animals subject to diagnosis or treatment include, for example, livestock and pets.
  • the term “incubating” refers to maintaining a planar sample and capture agent under conditions (which conditions include a period of time, a temperature, an appropriate binding buffer and a wash) that are suitable for specific binding of the capture agent to molecules (e.g., epitopes or complementary nucleic acid) in the planar sample.
  • capture agent refers to an agent that can specifically bind to complementary sites in a planar sample.
  • exemplary capture agents include, e.g., an antibody, an aptamer, and a nucleic acid (e.g., oligonucleotide) probe (which may be DNA or RNA) that hybridizes to a binding site. If antibodies are used, in many cases the antibodies may bind to protein epitopes. If nucleic acid probes are used, the nucleic acid probes may bind to, for example, genomic DNA or RNA (such that the location and abundance of intracellular RNAs can be detected).
  • the term “extendible”, in the context of, for example, a 3′ end that is “extendible using the other strand as a template”, means that a polymerase or ligase can add to the 3′ end of a nucleic acid molecule, where the template sequence that is immediately downstream of the 3′ end (i.e., on the other strand) determines which nucleotides (if a polymerase is used) or oligonucleotide (if a ligase is used) is added.
  • a “5′ end that is extendible using the other strand as a template” means that a ligase can add an oligonucleotide to the 5′ end of a nucleic acid molecule, where the template sequence that is immediately downstream of the 5′ end (i.e., on the other strand) determines which oligonucleotide is added.
  • template sequence that is immediately downstream to the 3′ end refers to the sequence on the other strand that use used as a template for extending the 3′ end, starting with the first nucleotide.
  • the template sequence that is immediately downstream of the 3′ end may be a sequence in the RCA product.
  • the template sequence that is immediately downstream of the 3′ end may be a 5′ overhang.
  • the term “capture agent that is linked to a double stranded nucleic acid” refers to a capture agent, e.g., an antibody or an oligonucleotide probe, that is non-covalently (e.g., via a streptavidin/biotin interaction) or covalently (e.g., via a click reaction or the like) linked to an double-stranded nucleic acid (which may be composed of two single-stranded oligonucleotide strands that are hybridized together, or an RCA product that is hybridized to a plurality of oligonucleotides) in a way that the capture agent can still bind to its binding site and the 3′ end of one of the nucleic acids is accessible to a polymerase and/or ligase.
  • a capture agent e.g., an antibody or an oligonucleotide probe
  • an oligonucleotide probe that is non-covalently (e.g.
  • the nucleic acid and the capture agent may be linked via a number of different methods, including those that use maleimide or halogen-containing group, which are cysteine-reactive.
  • the capture agent and the nucleic acid may be linked at, proximal to or at the 5′ end of one of the strands of the double stranded nucleic acid, proximal to or at the 3′ end of one of the strands of the double stranded nucleic acid, or anywhere in-between.
  • nucleic acid and “polynucleotide” are used interchangeably herein to describe a polymer of any length, e.g., greater than about 2 bases, greater than about 10 bases, greater than about 100 bases, greater than about 500 bases, greater than 1000 bases, up to about 10,000 or more bases composed of nucleotides, e.g., deoxyribonucleotides, ribonucleotides or a combination thereof, and may be produced enzymatically or synthetically (e.g., PNA as described in U.S. Pat. No.
  • Naturally-occurring nucleotides include guanine, cytosine, adenine, thymine, uracil (G, C, A, T and U respectively).
  • DNA and RNA have a deoxyribose and ribose sugar backbone, respectively, whereas PNA's backbone is composed of repeating N-(2-aminoethyl)-glycine units linked by peptide bonds.
  • LNA locked nucleic acid
  • a locked nucleic acid is a modified RNA nucleotide.
  • the ribose moiety of an LNA nucleotide is modified with an extra bridge connecting the 2′ oxygen and 4′ carbon. The bridge “locks” the ribose in the 3′-endo (North) conformation, which is often found in the A-form duplexes.
  • LNA nucleotides can be mixed with DNA or RNA residues in the oligonucleotide whenever desired.
  • unstructured nucleic acid is a nucleic acid containing non-natural nucleotides that bind to each other with reduced stability.
  • an unstructured nucleic acid may contain a G′ residue and a C′ residue, where these residues correspond to non-naturally occurring forms, i.e., analogs, of G and C that base pair with each other with reduced stability, but retain an ability to base pair with naturally occurring C and G residues, respectively.
  • Unstructured nucleic acid is described in US20050233340, which is incorporated by reference herein for disclosure of UNA.
  • oligonucleotide refers to a multimer of at least 10, e.g., at least 15 or at least 30 nucleotides. In some embodiments, an oligonucleotide may be in the range of 15-200 nucleotides in length, or more.
  • reading in the context of reading a fluorescent signal, refers to obtaining an image by scanning or by microscopy, where the image shows the pattern of fluorescence as well as the intensity of fluorescence in a field of view.
  • primer is an oligonucleotide, either natural or synthetic, that is capable, upon forming a duplex with a polynucleotide template, of acting as a point of initiation of nucleic acid synthesis and being extended from its 3′ end along the template so that an extended duplex is formed.
  • the sequence of nucleotides added during the extension process is determined by the sequence of the template polynucleotide.
  • primers are extended by a DNA polymerase.
  • a primer may be at least 10, e.g., at least 15 or at least 30 nucleotides in length.
  • single nucleotide 5′ overhang refers to a 5′ overhang, where the overhang is a single nucleotide in length.
  • a “two nucleotide 5′ overhang” is a 5′ overhang, where the overhang is two nucleotides in length. The 3′ end is recessed in a 5′ overhang.
  • the various nucleotides of an overhang may be referred to by their position, e.g., “first position” and “second position”.
  • the “position” is relative to the recessed 3′ end.
  • the “first” position of the overhang is immediately adjacent to the recessed 3′ end and the “second” position of the overhang is immediately adjacent to the first position.
  • the complementary strands of a double stranded oligonucleotide or nucleic acid may be referred to herein as being the “first” and “second” or the “top” and “bottom” strands.
  • the assignment of a strand as being a “top” or “bottom” strand is arbitrary and does not imply any particular orientation, function or structure.
  • fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide comprising a quencher refers to an oligonucleotide that contains a fluorophore and a quencher, wherein the quencher quenches the fluorophore in the same oligonucleotide.
  • the term “different” in the context of different 5′ overhangs that are different refers to overhangs that have a different sequence. Overhangs of different lengths (e.g., GATC vs GAT) implicitly have a different sequence, even through one sequence may be encompassed by the other.
  • the term “overhang” refers to a structure in which one strand of a double stranded nucleic acid ends such that nucleic acid synthesis can be initiated from that strand by a polymerase (or an oligonucleotide can be ligated to the end by a ligase) using the other strand as a template.
  • the term “adding to the extendible 3′ end”, in the context of adding one or more nucleotides or an oligonucleotide to an extendible 3′ end, refers to adding nucleotides (or an oligonucleotide) to an extendible 3′ end using the other strand as a template (e.g., adding to the recessed 3′ end of a 5′ overhang using the overhang as a template).
  • alternating stretches refers to two nucleotides stretches, where one “stretch” is a contiguous sequence of, e.g., up to 10, of the same nucleotide (e.g., a G, A, T or C), and the second stretch is contiguous sequence of, e.g., up to 10, of a different nucleotide, that alternate with one another, i.e., one stretch (e.g., a string of T's) occupies the odd positions and the other stretch (e.g., a string of A's) occupies the even positions.
  • one stretch e.g., a string of T's
  • the other stretch e.g., a string of A's
  • incomplete nucleotide mix comprises a nucleotide mix that contains one, two or three nucleotides (but not all four nucleotides) selected from G, A, T and C.
  • the nucleotides may be labeled or unlabeled.
  • reversible terminator refers to a chemically modified nucleotide base that when incorporated into growing DNA strand by DNA polymerase blocks further incorporation of bases. Such “reversible terminator” base and DNA strand can be deprotected by chemical treatment and following such deprotection DNA strand can be further extended by DNA polymerase.
  • fluorescently labeled reversible terminator refers to a “reversible terminator” base which is labeled by fluorophore through linker cleavable by same treatment which is used to deprotect the DNA strand which ends with this base. Deprotecting the “fluorescently labeled reversible terminator” simultaneously activates the DNA strand for further extension and removes the fluorescent label from it.
  • the method comprises producing a labeled a planar sample (e.g., an FFPE section mounted on a planar surface such as a microscope slide) using a capture agent that specifically binds to complementary sites in the planar sample.
  • a planar sample e.g., an FFPE section mounted on a planar surface such as a microscope slide
  • a capture agent that specifically binds to complementary sites in the planar sample.
  • the capture agent in the labeled sample is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand (e.g., two oligonucleotide that are hybridized together or an RCA product that is hybridized to oligonucleotides) and the capture agent is linked (covalently or non-covalently via a biotin) to the double-stranded nucleic acid by the first strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid (e.g., by the 5′ end, the 3′ end, or anywhere in-between), and the 3′ end or 5′ end of one of the strands (e.g., the 3′ end of the first strand, any 3′ ends in the second strand, the 5′ end of the first strand or any 5′ ends in the second strand) is extendible using the other strand as a template.
  • a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand
  • the capture agent
  • the capture agent is cross-linked the planar sample, thereby preventing the capture agent from disassociating during subsequent steps.
  • This crosslinking step may be done using any amine-to-amine crosslinker (e.g. formaldehyde, disuccinimiyllutarate or another reagents of similar action) although a variety of other chemistries can be used to cross-link the capture agent to the planar sample if desired.
  • the method comprises reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of a nucleotide or short oligonucleotide (e.g., of 2-10 bases) to the extendible end (e.g., the 3′ end) of one of the strands.
  • This step may be done by contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix, a ligase and a labeled oligonucleotide, or a combination of the two, thereby adding one or more nucleotides and/or a labeled oligonucleotide to the extendible end; and reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the one or more nucleotides or oligonucleotide to the extendible end.
  • the fluorescent signal may be generated by a variety of different methods.
  • the fluorescent signal may be fluorescence from a fluorescent nucleotide added to the end of the primer, or a FRET (fluorescence resonance energy transfer) signal resulting from the same.
  • the signal may generated by removing a quencher from a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide that is also hybridized to the oligonucleotide.
  • the reading step may be followed by inactivating the fluorescence after reading so that other binding events can be detected and read.
  • the fluorescence may be inactivated by peroxide-based bleaching, cleavage of fluorophore linked to nucleotide through cleavable linker (e.g. using TCEP as a cleaving reagent), base-exchange by exo+ polymerase such as Vent, or subsequent incorporation of quencher, for example.
  • the method may be multiplexed in a way that a single planar sample can be interrogated by a plurality of different capture agents, where each antibody is linked to a different oligonucleotide (i.e., oligonucleotides of different sequence).
  • the planar sample may be labeled using at least 5, at least 10, at least 20, at least 30, at least 50, or at least 100, up to 150 or more capture agents that are each linked to a different oligonucleotide, and binding of the capture agents can be separately read using a fluorescence microscope equipped with an appropriate filter for each fluorophore, or by using dual or triple band-pass filter sets to observe multiple fluorophores.
  • the oligonucleotides linked to the capture agent may act as a splint for a padlock probe, and as a primer for initiating rolling circle amplification.
  • the capture agent used in some embodiments of the method may be linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide that contains a 5′ overhang (i.e., a recessed 3′ end that can be extended by a polymerase or ligase) or a 3′ overhang (i.e., a recessed 5′ end that can be extended by a ligase).
  • a 5′ overhang i.e., a recessed 3′ end that can be extended by a polymerase or ligase
  • a 3′ overhang i.e., a recessed 5′ end that can be extended by a ligase
  • the overhang is a single nucleotide overhang (e.g., an A), although a longer overhang (e.g., at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, at least 6, at least 8, at least 10, at least 20, or at least at least 30, may be useful for other applications (e.g., multiplexed applications).
  • the overhang may contain a repeated sequence, e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 or more repeats of the same sequence of 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 nucleotides, thereby allowing the capture agent to be used in multiplexed applications as described below.
  • the double stranded oligonucleotide may have a recessed 3′ end at the other end of the oligonucleotide (i.e., at the end closest to the capture agent). However, this end may be designed to be not extendible.
  • the double-stranded oligonucleotide may contain one or more third oligonucleotides that are hybridized to the overhang. In these embodiments, there will be a gap of 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 or more nucleotides between the second strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide and the oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the overhang (see, e.g., FIGS. 7 and 8 ).
  • the plurality of capture agents may be distinguished by the sequence of the overhang and not by the sequence of the first strand of the double stranded oligonucleotide.
  • the second strand of the double stranded oligonucleotides is different for each of the capture agents.
  • the method may also be implemented using capture agents that are linked to a primer that acts a splint for circularlizing a padlock probe and for priming amplification of circularlized padlock probe by rolling circle amplification.
  • the capture agents in the labeled sample may be linked to a rolling circle amplification product.
  • the fluorophore used may be a coumarin, a cyanine, a benzofuran, a quinoline, a quinazolinone, an indole, a benzazole, a borapolyazaindacene and or a xanthene including fluorescein, rhodamine and rhodol.
  • fluorophores may be chosen so that they are distinguishable, i.e., independently detectable, from one another, meaning that the labels can be independently detected and measured, even when the labels are mixed.
  • the amounts of label present (e.g., the amount of fluorescence) for each of the labels are separately determinable, even when the labels are co-located (e.g., in the same tube or in the same area of the section).
  • fluorescent dyes of interest include: xanthene dyes, e.g., fluorescein and rhodamine dyes, such as fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC), 6-carboxyfluorescein (commonly known by the abbreviations FAM and F), 6-carboxy-2′,4′,7′,4,7-hexachlorofluorescein (HEX), 6-carboxy-4′, 5′-dichloro-2′, 7′-dimethoxyfluorescein (JOE or J), N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyl-6-carboxyrhodamine (TAMRA or T), 6-carboxy-X-rhodamine (ROX or R), 5-carboxyrhodamine-6G (R6G 5 or G 5 ), 6-carboxyrhodamine-6G (R6G 6 or G 6 ), and rhodamine 110; cyanine dyes, e.g., Cy3, Cy5
  • phenanthridine dyes e.g., Texas Red
  • ethidium dyes e.g., acridine dyes
  • carbazole dyes e.g., phenoxazine dyes
  • porphyrin dyes e.g., polymethine dyes, e.g., BODIPY dyes and quinoline dyes.
  • fluorophores of interest that are commonly used in subject applications include: Pyrene, Coumarin, Diethylaminocoumarin, FAM, Fluorescein Chlorotriazinyl, Fluorescein, R110, Eosin, JOE, R6G, Tetramethylrhodamine, TAMRA, Lissamine, Napthofluorescein, Texas Red, Cy3, and Cy5, etc.
  • Suitable distinguishable fluorescent label pairs useful in the subject methods include Cy-3 and Cy-5 (Amersham Inc., Piscataway, N.J.), Quasar 570 and Quasar 670 (Biosearch Technology, Novato Calif.), Alexafluor555 and Alexafluor647 (Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.), BODIPY V-1002 and BODIPY V1005 (Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.), POPO-3 and TOTO-3 (Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.), and POPRO3 and TOPRO3 (Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.). Further suitable distinguishable detectable labels may be found in Kricka et al. (Ann Clin Biochem. 39:114-29, 2002), Ried et al. (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 1992: 89: 1388-1392) and Tanke et al. (Eur. J. Hum. Genet. 1999 7:2-11) and others.
  • the sample may be stained using a cytological stain, either before or after performing the method described above.
  • the stain may be, for example, phalloidin, gadodiamide, acridine orange, bismarck brown, barmine, Coomassie blue, bresyl violet, brystal violet, DAPI, hematoxylin, eosin, ethidium bromide, acid fuchsine, haematoxylin, hoechst stains, iodine, malachite green, methyl green, methylene blue, neutral red, Nile blue, Nile red, osmium tetroxide (formal name: osmium tetraoxide), rhodamine, safranin, phosphotungstic acid, osmium tetroxide, ruthenium tetroxide, ammonium molybdate, cadmium iodide,
  • the stain may be specific for any feature of interest, such as a protein or class of proteins, phospholipids, DNA (e.g., dsDNA, ssDNA), RNA, an organelle (e.g., cell membrane, mitochondria, endoplasmic recticulum, golgi body, nulear envelope, and so forth), a compartment of the cell (e.g., cytosol, nuclear fraction, and so forth).
  • the stain may enhance contrast or imaging of intracellular or extracellular structures.
  • the sample may be stained with haematoxylin and eosin (H&E).
  • nucleotides are only exemplary and other nucleotides, including nucleotides that are cleavable by other stimuli (e.g., photocleavable nucleotides) can be used in the present method.
  • the fluorescent signal may be produced by a fluorescent nucleotide that is added to (i.e., added by a polymerase or, if the fluorescent nucleotide is in an oligonucleotide, ligated onto) the 3′ end of the primer.
  • This method may comprise reading a signal from the added fluorescent nucleotide, or reading a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two fluorescent nucleotides that are added to the primer.
  • FIGS. 1 and 2 shows how an antibody can be linked to a oligonucleotide chemically, or via biotin/streptavidin interactions ( FIG. 1B ) and how a fluorescent signal can be generated by adding a fluorescent nucleotide to the end of the primer ( FIG. 2 ).
  • the antigen is stained by an antibody that is coupled to a DNA dimer with an overhanging 5′ end (lower strand) and recessed 3′ end (upper strand) either chemically ( FIG. 1 top panel) or through streptavidin ( FIG. 1 bottom and middle panels).
  • the pattern of binding of the capture agent may be determined using an on-slide end fill-in reaction by using a suitable polymerase (e.g., by exo ⁇ Klenow, Bst, Taq, Klentaq, or an exo ⁇ Klenow-Vent mixture) and fluorescently labeled nucleotide ( FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 top panel).
  • a suitable polymerase e.g., by exo ⁇ Klenow, Bst, Taq, Klentaq, or an exo ⁇ Klenow-Vent mixture
  • fluorescently labeled nucleotide FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 top panel
  • the signal-to-noise ratio can be increased by: a) multimerization of position complementary to labeling nucleotide ( FIG. 2 , middle panel); or b) by generating a FRET between two nucleotides are incorporated, whereby the emission wavelength of one of the nucleotides ( FIG. 2 , bottom panel C on the figure) serves as an excitation wavelength for another ( FIG. 2 , bottom panel U on the figure).
  • Fluorescence may be inactivated before addition of subsequent staining reagents by any convenient method including, but not limited to photobleaching, peroxide-based bleaching, inactivation by ozone, cleavage of fluorophore linked to nucleotide through cleavable linker (e.g. using TCEP as a cleaving reagent), base-exchange by exo+ polymerase such as Vent, subsequent incorporation of quencher.
  • any convenient method including, but not limited to photobleaching, peroxide-based bleaching, inactivation by ozone, cleavage of fluorophore linked to nucleotide through cleavable linker (e.g. using TCEP as a cleaving reagent), base-exchange by exo+ polymerase such as Vent, subsequent incorporation of quencher.
  • the method can be repeated, i.e., the planar sample may be re-stained using a different antibody and fluorescence can be read.
  • oligonucleotides can be implemented using specially designed oligonucleotides using two different approaches, referred to as the “reversible terminator” and “missing base” approaches, which are described in greater detail below. Both of these methods rely on a composition comprising a plurality of (e.g., at least 5, at least 10, at least 20, at least 30, at least 50, or at least 100, up to 150 or more) capture agents that recognize different complementary sites, wherein: each of the capture agents is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid (e.g., oligonucleotide) that comprises a first strand and a second strand; the capture agents are linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid by the (e.g., the 5′ end of) the first strand; the 3′ end of one of the strands in each of the double-stranded nucleic acids extendible using the other strand as a template, where the template is different for each of the capture agents.
  • a composition compris
  • FIGS. 3 and 4 Examples of such compositions are illustrated in FIGS. 3 and 4 , where the template is an overhang.
  • the general principle shown in FIGS. 3 and 4 can be extended to double stranded nucleic acids that comprise RCA products.
  • FIG. 3 shows a population of capture agents that have a template (e.g., overhang) defined by the formula: 3′-N 4n N 1 /N 2 /N 3 -5′ followed by short stretch of random composition on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, where N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 0, 1 or more.
  • FIG. 3 shows a population of capture agents that have a template (e.g., overhang) defined by the formula: 3′-N 4n N 1 /N 2 /N 3 -5′ followed by short stretch of random composition on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, where
  • Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of bases N 3 and N 4 , wherein nucleotide N 3 is in odd positions and nucleotide N 4 is in even positions, counting from the start of the overhang and N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • the sequence of the first strand is the same for each of the capture agents; and the sequence of the second strand is different for each of the capture agents.
  • the different second strands make the overhangs different between the different capture agents.
  • the multiplex methods may generally comprise: (a) incubating a planar sample with an above-described antibody composition under conditions by which the capture agents bind to complementary sites in the planar sample; (b) cross-linking the capture agents to the planar sample; (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and either an incomplete nucleotide mix of labeled and unlabeled nucleotides or a nucleotide mix where some or all nucleotides are fluorescent and some or all nucleotides are reversible terminator nucleotides or fluorescent reversible terminator nucleotides and optionally, contacting the planar sample with a mixture of labelled and unlabeled oligonucleotides and a DNA ligase enzyme that covalently attaches the short labelled oligonucleotides to the 3′ end of the oligonucleotide duplexes that are attached to the specific capture agents.
  • oligonucleotides are only added to duplexes that an overhang that is complementary to the oligonucleotide.
  • This method further comprises (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition a nucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents. Following signal registration, this method may comprise (e) removing the fluorescent signals by chemical or photocleavage of a labeled nucleotide if the reversible terminator approach is used, followed by deprotecting the 3′ ends of the oligonucleotides, enabling the addition of further nucleotides and/or oligonucleotides.
  • Step (c) of this method may comprise (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and: (i) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , N 2 and N 3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 or (ii) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent reversible terminator nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , N 2 and N 3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 or (iii) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , and N 2 , an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N 3 , and no nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 , thereby adding fluorescent nucleotides onto the double-stranded oligonucleotides of some but not all of the capture agents thereby adding fluorescent nucleotides onto the double-strande
  • the length of the read over the oligonucleotide overhangs may increase accordingly. This may or may not reduce the efficiency of staining due to accumulation of primer extension errors along the length of the oligonucleotide duplex.
  • the plurality of capture agents can be divided in sets such that number of capture agents in the set does exceed the capacity of the multiplexing protocol to render staining without significant signal loss (e.g. 30).
  • Each such set of capture agents will be conjugated to “terminated” (the last 3′ base is dideoxy- or propyl-modified) upper strand oligonucleotide of the same sequence as in the original version of the “missing base” approach.
  • the lower strand oligonucleotides will incorporate an additional set-specific region which will serve as a landing spot for an additional primer which is to be on-slide hybridized to the particular subset of the total plurality of the antibodies at the time when they are to be rendered. This approach allows not to extend the reads beyond certain threshold and at the same time have an unlimited potential number of capture agents in the sample.
  • This implementation of the method relies on reversible terminators, i.e., chain terminator nucleotides that can be de-protected after incorporation, thereby allowing further nucleotides to be added to that nucleotide.
  • This method can be implemented using a composition comprising a plurality of capture agents that are linked to a double stranded nucleic acid (e.g., oligonucleotides), as illustrated in FIG. 3 .
  • the top strand of the double stranded nucleic acid is linked to the capture agent and may be the same for each antibody, and the sequence of the bottom strand varies between capture agents. As shown on FIG.
  • the 5′ end of the lower strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid (which may form an overhang) is of the general 3′-N 4n N 1 /N 2 /N 3 -5′ followed by short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, where N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 0, 1 or more. As shown on FIG.
  • 5B a more general formula of lower oligonucleotide overhang 3′-XN 1 /N 2 /N 3 -5′, where N 1 , N 2 , N 3 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and X is a nucleotide stretch of bases Xi (such that Xi are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C) of random composition and length is also applicable in this method.
  • this method may comprise: (a) incubating a planar sample with a multiplex antibody composition in which the overhangs are of the formula 5′-N 1 /N 2 /N 3 N 4n , wherein N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more; under conditions by which the capture agents specifically bind to complementary sites in the planar sample; (b) cross-linking the capture agent to the planar sample; (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , N 2 and N 3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 and/or ligating a oligonucleotide that comprises a labeled nucleotide; and (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition of a nucleotide to some
  • This cycle may be repeated by (e) inactivating the fluorescent signal, deprotecting the reversible terminator nucleotide and (f) blocking the planar sample; and repeating steps (c) and (d).
  • the method may comprise repeating steps (c), (d) (e) and (f) multiple times.
  • the reagent used for blocking may vary depending on the chemistry used.
  • the sample may be blocked with a thiol-reactive compounds such as cysteine, glutathione or iodoacetamide.
  • this method can be implemented using a composition comprising: a first antibody linked to a first double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the first double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a single nucleotide 5′ overhang comprising base N 1 ; a second antibody linked to a second double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the second double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a single nucleotide 5′ overhang comprising base N 2 ; a third antibody linked to a third double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the third double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a single nucleotide 5′ overhang comprising base N 3 ; a fourth antibody linked to a fourth double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a two nucleotide 5′ overhang, wherein the first position of the overhang comprises base N 4 and the second position of the overhang is base N
  • the strand linked to the antibodies may be different for each of the antibodies, where the RCA product contains a sequence conforming to the formula described above in each repeat of the RCA product.
  • the composition may also contain a seventh antibody linked to a seventh double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the seventh double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a multiple nucleotide 5′ overhang, wherein the first position of the overhang comprises base N 4 , the second position of the overhang is base N 4 and third is selected from N 1 , N 2 , and N 3 .
  • the same principle may be applied to overhangs that have more than 7 positions (e.g., 9, 10, 11 up to 20, 30, or 40 ore more) positions.
  • the planar sample can be co-stained simultaneously using a panel of capture agents, each labeled with one oligonucleotide duplex designed according to the strategy outlined on FIG. 3 .
  • the duplexes are designed in such a way that each antibody has the same upper strand sequence linked, covalently or through streptavidin, to an antibody through the 5′ end.
  • the lower strand changes from antibody to antibody.
  • the general formula for the lower strand is 3′-dideoxydC-sequence-complimentary-to-upper-strand G n A/T/C-5′.
  • nucleotide G is reserved for step-wise progression and its complementary pair on the upper strand is never used in labeled form.
  • the other three bases are complementary to labeled nucleotides and can be used to identify three capture agents per cycle.
  • the general formula for the lower strand is 3′-dideoxydC-sequence-complimentary-to-upper-strand-X-N 1 /N 2 /N 3 -5′ where X, of X is any nucleotide excluding one reserved for “walking base” of this particular cycle and X is any base as shown on FIG. 5B .
  • Each cycle includes: (a) a labeling step in which the three capture agents are labeled and duplexes on the rest are extended one base at a time, (b) an imaging step and (c) a destaining/deprotection step.
  • the added fluorescent labels from the previous cycle are inactivated by any of the suitable methods, including but not limited to: cleavage of fluorophore off the nucleotide (if the labeled nucleotide is linked to the fluorophore through a cleavable linker); peroxide based bleaching; photobleaching; chemically-assisted photobleaching; labeled base replacement by exo+ polymerase, etc.
  • the unlabeled “extension” nucleotide that has been added to the remainder of the capture agents is activated by cleavage of the protective group off its 3′ end.
  • This implementation of the method relies on a “missing” base design in which, in each cycle, two labeled and one unlabeled nucleotides are added to the reaction, and the “missing base” prevents the primers from being extended by more than a single nucleotide.
  • This method can be implemented using a composition comprising a plurality of capture agents that are linked to double stranded nucleic acids, as illustrated in FIG. 4 .
  • the top strand of the double stranded nucleic acids is linked to the capture agent and may be the same for each antibody, and the sequence of the bottom strand varies between capture agents. As shown in FIG. 4
  • the 5′ end of the lower strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide (which forms the overhang) is of the general formula 3′-YN 1 /N 2 -5′, optionally followed by short stretch (e.g., 1-5 residues) of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of bases N 3 and N 4 , wherein nucleotide N 3 is in odd positions and nucleotide N 4 is in even positions, counting from the start of the overhang and N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of alternating random length stretches of bases N 3 and N 4 such that the order number of N 3 — stretches is odd and of N 4 stretches is even, may be applicable in this method
  • this method may comprise: (a) incubating a planar sample with a multiplex antibody composition in which the overhangs are of the formula (3′-YN 1 /N 2 -5′) described in the prior paragraph; under conditions by which the capture agents specifically bind complementary sites in the planar sample; (b) cross-linking the capture agent to the planar sample; (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , and N 2 , an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N 3 and no nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 and/or ligating an oligonucleotide that has a labeled nucleotide; and (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition of a nucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents.
  • This cycle may be repeated by (e) inactivating the fluorescent signal, (f) blocking the sample and contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 and/or contacting the sample with a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase; and repeating steps (c) (d).
  • the method may comprise repeating steps (c), (d), (e) and (f) multiple times.
  • This method can be implemented using a capture agent composition that comprises: a first antibody linked to a first double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the first double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a single nucleotide 5′ overhang comprising base N 1 ; a second antibody linked to a second double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the second double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a single nucleotide 5′ overhang comprising base N 2 ; a third antibody linked to a fourth double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the third double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a two nucleotide 5′ overhang, wherein the first from the 3′ position of the overhang comprises base N 4 and the second position comprises N 1 ; and a fourth antibody linked to a fourth double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the fourth double stranded oligonucleot
  • the composition may also contain a fifth antibody linked to a fifth double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the fifth double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a multiple nucleotide 5′ overhang, wherein the first position of the overhang comprises base N 4 , the second position comprises base N 3 , and the third position comprises N 1 or N 2 .
  • the missing base approach does not use reversible terminators. Instead, extension of a single nucleotide is ensured by using two interchanging bases (e.g., T and C as shown in FIG. 4 instead of the corresponding G in the “reversible terminators” approach) and adding only one of the two dNTPs at a time in the primer extension reaction. After the incorporation of the first nucleotide, the absence of the second dNTP causes strand elongation to stall, thereby ensuring that the primers are extended by only a single nucleotide. As in the previous strategy, all complementary sites can be co-stained simultaneously using capture agents, each labeled with a specific oligonucleotide duplex.
  • two interchanging bases e.g., T and C as shown in FIG. 4 instead of the corresponding G in the “reversible terminators” approach
  • the duplexes can be designed using the strategy shown in FIG. 4 , i.e., in such a way that each antibody has the same upper stand oligonucleotide sequence linked to it via covalent bond or through a streptavidin-biotin interaction.
  • the lower strand changes from antibody to antibody.
  • the general formula for the lower strand is 3′ ddC-sequence-complimentary-to-upper-strand -YA/N 2 -5′ where Y is composed of bases T and C such that T can be found only in even and C only at odd positions.
  • N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of alternating random length stretches of bases N 3 and N 4 such that the order number of N 3 — stretches is odd and of N 4 stretches is even.
  • n is 0, 1 or more
  • each cycle can have three steps: a labeling step in which the two capture agents are labeled by incorporation of fluorescent dNTPs and all of the other duplexes are extended one base at a time, an imaging step, and a de-staining/reactivation step.
  • the strand linked to the antibodies may be different for each of the antibodies, where the RCA product contains a sequence conforming to the formula described above in each repeat of the RCA product.
  • the labeled capture agents from the prior cycle can be bleached/destained in the same way as described above.
  • a quencher labeled nucleotide can be incorporated after the labeled base. Because, in this embodiment, the position that is labeled is the last position in the overhang, the labeled capture agents from prior cycle cannot be re-labeled in later cycles because all nucleotide positions in the overhang have been filled in.
  • the performance of “reversible terminator method” as exemplified in sequential detection of CD4 and CD8 positive T-cells in smears of mouse splenocytes is illustrated in FIG. 13, 15 and FIG. 16 .
  • extension of a primer by nick translation removes a quencher from a fluorescently labeled “detector” oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the lower strand oligonucleotide in such a way that is positioned downstream from the upper strand primer.
  • detector oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the lower strand oligonucleotide in such a way that is positioned downstream from the upper strand primer.
  • the multiplexed implementations may comprise: (a) incubating the planar sample with a plurality of capture agents that are linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide; (b) crosslinking the capture agents to the planar sample; (c) extending a primer that is hybridized to the oligonucleotide of a first set of capture agents of the plurality, thereby generating a first set of fluorescent signals (e.g., by removing the quencher from a labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the oligonucleotide downstream from the primer), e.g., by adding a nucleotide using a polymerase or by adding an oligonucleotide using a ligase; (d) reading the first set of fluorescent signals using fluorescence microscopy; (e) inactivating the fluorescence; (f) extending a primer that is hybridized to the oligonucleotide of a
  • the architecture of the double-stranded oligonucleotides linked to the capture agent has a specific design which is effectively enabling rendering of the capture agent binding pattern by “nick translation”.
  • the duplex of the upper strand and the lower strand oligonucleotide with long 5′ overhang of the lower strand is further hybridized to a small detector oligonucleotide labeled both by fluorescent and the quencher.
  • nick translating polymerase such as DNA pol I removes the quencher from some but not all of the quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some but not all of the capture agents.
  • the method generally comprises: (i) labeling a planar sample with: i. a first antibody, wherein the first antibody is linked to a first oligonucleotide duplex comprising, lower strand oligonucleotide with a unique sequence hybridized thereto: (i) an oligonucleotide upper strand “primer” and (ii) a labeled upper strand oligonucleotide comprising a 5′ quencher at a site that is downstream from the primer; and a fluorophore downstream from the quencher and ii.
  • a second antibody wherein the second antibody is linked to a second oligonucleotide duplex comprising, lower strand oligonucleotide with unique sequence hybridized thereto: (i) an oligonucleotide upper strand “primer” and (ii) an upper strand oligonucleotide labeled both by fluorophore and a quencher; wherein the gap between the 3′ end of the primer and the 5′ end of the labeled oligonucleotide is different for the first and second oligonucleotides; (ii) incubating the tissue sample with a first nucleotide mix and a polymerase, thereby removing the quencher from only the labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the first oligonucleotide and producing a first fluorescent signal; (iii) reading the first fluorescent signal using fluorescence microscopy; (iv) inactivating the fluorescent signal by further progression of nick-trans
  • FIGS. 7 and 8 show an example of this method.
  • the multiplexing method shown in FIG. 8 has the following steps:
  • Step 1 The planar sample is stained by capture agents that are coupled to a DNA double-stranded oligonucleotide chemically or through streptavidin (as described in FIG. 1 ) such that the top strand of the duplex contains a nick or a single base deletion followed by a nucleotide stretch bordered by a fluorophore and its quencher on two ends (“molecular beacon” or Taqman based design).
  • capture agents that are coupled to a DNA double-stranded oligonucleotide chemically or through streptavidin (as described in FIG. 1 ) such that the top strand of the duplex contains a nick or a single base deletion followed by a nucleotide stretch bordered by a fluorophore and its quencher on two ends (“molecular beacon” or Taqman based design).
  • Step 2 Staining pattern is rendered by a nick-translation reaction carried out by any 5′ exo+ polymerase such as DnaPolI Klenow fragment in the presence of a single letter (A as in FIG. 5 for example).
  • nick translation removes the quencher but stops before removing the part of the duplex with the fluorophore.
  • Step 3 For rendering of other staining reagents, the fluorescence is removed by continuing nick translation in the presence of the letters of the stretch bearing the fluorophore.
  • Step 4 When multiplexing is desired, multiplexing can be achieved by special design of oligonucleotide duplexes attached to detection reagents.
  • each antibody set (two or three per cycle) has a gap of an increasing length between the top strand priming and the detector oligonucleotide. This sequence gap on the strand bearing the quencher/fluorophore pair is filled up to final nick in such a way that single base is extended per cycle, similar to how it is achieved in method 1 (see FIG. 8 ).
  • the method comprises rending antibody staining by primer extension with a fluorophore labeled base or otherwise reading a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between a first fluorescent nucleotide added to the primer by primer extension and a second nucleotide that is present in the oligonucleotide FIG. 10 .
  • the principles of this method are illustrated in FIG. 9A .
  • the multiplexing is achieved by removing the extension priming oligonucleotide by melting the duplex or by exonuclease and reannealing another primer oligonucleotide which is extendable on a different antibody.
  • FIG. 9B A multiplexed version of this method is shown in FIG. 9B .
  • the multiplexed implementations may comprise: (a) incubating the planar sample with a plurality of capture agents; (b) cross-linking the capture agents to the planar sample; (c) extending a primer that is hybridized to the oligonucleotide of a first set of capture agents of the plurality (e.g., wherein the 3′ end of the first primer anneals to only the oligonucleotide of the first population), thereby generating a first set of fluorescent signals (which step can be done by adding a labeled nucleotide using polymerase and/or contacting the sample with a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase); (d) reading the first set of fluorescent signals using fluorescence microscopy; (e) inactivating the fluorescence; (f) extending a primer that hybridized to the oligonucleotide of a second set of capture agents of the plurality (e.g., wherein the 3′ end
  • this method comprises: (a) incubating the planar sample with (i) a first antibody that is linked to a first labeled oligonucleotide and (ii) a second antibody that is linked to a second labeled oligonucleotide, (b) cross-linking the capture agents to the planar sample; (c) hybridizing the first and second labeled oligonucleotides with a first primer, wherein the 3′ end of the first primer anneals to only the first labeled oligonucleotide; (d) extending the primer with a fluorescent nucleotide (which step can be done by adding a labeled nucleotide using polymerase and/or contacting the sample with a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase); (e) reading, by fluorescence microscopy, a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between the label of the first oligonucleotide and the fluorescent nucleotide
  • FIGS. 9-10 shows an example of this method.
  • the method shown in FIGS. 8-11 has the following steps:
  • Step 1 The planar sample is stained using a capture agent that is coupled to a single stranded oligonucleotide.
  • the oligonucleotide could be either unlabeled or labeled by FRET acceptor (e.g. Cy5) fluorophore on the 3′ end.
  • Step 2 The binding pattern can be determined by an on-slide hybridization of a complementary probe followed a primer extension reaction in which a fluorescently labeled nucleotide fills in the overhang in the extended strand.
  • the extended base is labeled by a FRET donor (e.g. Cy3), which can increase the signal to noise ratio. If the oligonucleotide that is linked to the capture agent is unlabeled, then the fluorescent emission of the nucleotide that has been incorporated by DNA synthesis can be detected directly, without FRET FIG. 9 .
  • Step 3 The binding pattern of other capture agents can be determined by removing the fluorescence by cleavage of lower strand by exo+ DNA polymerase such as Vent ( FIG. 9 ). Alternatively, the fluorescence can be removed by raising the temperature beyond the melting point of the DNA strands or by one of the de-staining techniques described previously.
  • Step 4 Multiplexing can be achieved by staining of the sample with a library of capture agents each labeled with specific oligonucleotides and cycling through Steps 1-3, as described above, each time using a different detection oligonucleotide that is complementary to one of the capture agent-conjugated oligonucleotides. Only duplexes where primers are annealed specifically will be properly extended ( FIG. 11 ). In these embodiments, each primers is designed so that its 3′ end hybridizes to only one of the oligonucleotides that are linked to a capture agent.
  • the signal may be amplified using rolling circle amplification.
  • a capture agent that is linked to an oligonucleotide is hybridized to a padlock probe that hybridizes to the oligonucleotide in such a way that the ends of the padlock probe are ligatably adjacent.
  • the padlock probe (which is now circularized) can be copied by a rolling circle amplification reaction that is primed by the oligonucleotide. This reaction results in a concatamer of the padlock probe that contains several (in many cases hundreds or thousands) of copies of the same sequence in tandem that is linked to the capture agent.
  • the rolling circle amplification product (which is linked to the antibody) can be detected using methods described above and, as illustrated, the signal is amplified because the sequence being detected is repeated.
  • the (i) the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand (i.e., the RCA product) and a second strand (comprising the detection oligonucleotides). Single molecules can be detected using such methods.
  • FIG. 19 shows how RNA molecules can be detected using a padlock probe/RCA amplification approach.
  • the padlock probe hybridizes to the same mRNA as the capture agent (the “splint-primer”), thereby ensuring that the padlock probe circularizes only in the presence of the target RNA.
  • the splint-primer hybridizes to the target RNA, acts as a splint for the padlock probe, and also acts as a primer for rolling circle amplification, thereby allowing the signal to be amplified in a similar to FIG. 16 .
  • FIG. 20 shows an alternative method that relies on primer extension and the ligation of a short, labeled oligonucleotide.
  • ligation of short labeled oligonucleotide to the top strand oligonucleotide only occurs after the overhang has been filed in to a certain point.
  • a labeled oligonucleotide can be added to either the 3′ end or the 5′ end of the extendible end.
  • compositions described herein find general use in a wide variety of application for analysis of any planar sample (e.g., in the analysis of tissue sections, sheets of cells, spun-down cells, blots of electrophoresis gels, Western blots, dot-blots, ELISAs, antibody microarrays, nucleic acid microarrays etc).
  • planar sample e.g., in the analysis of tissue sections, sheets of cells, spun-down cells, blots of electrophoresis gels, Western blots, dot-blots, ELISAs, antibody microarrays, nucleic acid microarrays etc).
  • the planar sample may be a section of a tissue biopsy obtained from a patient.
  • Biopsies of interest include both tumor and non-neoplastic biopsies of skin (melanomas, carcinomas, etc.), soft tissue, bone, breast, colon, liver, kidney, adrenal, gastrointestinal, pancreatic, gall bladder, salivary gland, cervical, ovary, uterus, testis, prostate, lung, thymus, thyroid, parathyroid, pituitary (adenomas, etc.), brain, spinal cord, ocular, nerve, and skeletal muscle, etc.
  • capture agents specifically bind to biomarkers, including cancer biomarkers, that may be proteinaceous or a nucleic acid.
  • cancer biomarkers include, but are not limited to carcinoembryonic antigen (for identification of adenocarcinomas), cytokeratins (for identification of carcinomas but may also be expressed in some sarcomas), CD15 and CD30 (for Hodgkin's disease), alpha fetoprotein (for yolk sac tumors and hepatocellular carcinoma), CD117 (for gastrointestinal stromal tumors), CD10 (for renal cell carcinoma and acute lymphoblastic leukemia), prostate specific antigen (for prostate cancer), estrogens and progesterone (for tumour identification), CD20 (for identification of B-cell lymphomas) and CD3 (for identification of T-cell lymphomas).
  • carcinoembryonic antigen for identification of adenocarcinomas
  • cytokeratins for identification of carcinomas but may also be expressed in some sarcomas
  • the above-described method can be used to analyze cells from a subject to determine, for example, whether the cell is normal or not or to determine whether the cells are responding to a treatment.
  • the method may be employed to determine the degree of dysplasia in cancer cells.
  • the cells may be a sample from a multicellular organism.
  • a biological sample may be isolated from an individual, e.g., from a soft tissue.
  • the method may be used to distinguish different types of cancer cells in FFPE samples.
  • the method described above finds particular utility in examining planar samples using a plurality of antibodies, each antibodies recognizing a different marker. Examples of cancers, and biomarkers that can be used to identify those cancers, are shown below. In these embodiments, one does not need to examine all of the markers listed below in order to make a diagnosis.
  • Acute Leukemia IHC Panel CD3, CD7, CD20, CD34, CD45, CD56, CD117, MPO, PAX-5, and TdT.
  • Adenocarcinoma vs. Mesothelioma IHC Pan-CK, CEA, MOC-31, BerEP4, TTF1, calretinin, and WT-1.
  • Panel Bladder vs. Prostate Carcinoma IHC Panel CK7, CK20, PSA, CK 903, and p63.
  • Burkitt vs. DLBC Lymphoma IHC panel BCL-2, c-MYC, Ki-67.
  • Carcinoma Unknown Primary Site Female CK7, CK20, mammaglobin ER, TTF1, CEA, CA19-9, S100, (CUPS IHC Panel - Female) synaptophysin, and WT-1.
  • Carcinoma Unknown Primary Site Male CK7, CK20, TTF1, PSA, CEA, CA19-9, S100, and (CUPS IHC Panel - Male) synaptophysin.
  • GIST IHC Panel CD117, DOG-1, CD34, and desmin. Hepatoma/Cholangio vs. Metastatic HSA (HepPar 1), CDX2, CK7, CK20, CAM 5.2, TF-1, and Carcinoma IHC Panel CEA (polyclonal).
  • Lung Cancer IHC Panel chromogranin A, synaptophysin, CK7, p63, and TTF-1.
  • the method may be employed to detect the location and, optionally, the abundance of DNA molecules and/or RNA molecules in situ.
  • the method may be used to detect intracellular RNAs.
  • the capture agent may be a nucleic acid, and the intracellular location and, optionally, the abundance of RNA molecules (e.g., mRNAs or lncRNAs) may be detected in situ.
  • RNA molecules e.g., mRNAs or lncRNAs
  • hybridization methods may be adapted from known RNA or DNA FISH methods (see, e.g., Mahadevaiah et al (Methods Mol Biol. 2009 558:433-44), Shaffer et al (PLoS One. 2013 8:e75120) and Pollex et al (Methods Mol. Biol. 2013 1042:13-31), which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • the method may involve obtaining an image as described above (an electronic form of which may have been forwarded from a remote location) and may be analyzed by a doctor or other medical professional to determine whether a patient has abnormal cells (e.g., cancerous cells) or which type of abnormal cells are present.
  • the image may be used as a diagnostic to determine whether the subject has a disease or condition, e.g., a cancer.
  • the method may be used to determine the stage of a cancer, to identify metastasized cells, or to monitor a patient's response to a treatment, for example.
  • compositions and methods described herein can be used to diagnose a patient with a disease.
  • the presence or absence of a biomarker in the patient's sample can indicate that the patient has a particular disease (e.g., cancer).
  • a patient can be diagnosed with a disease by comparing a sample from the patient with a sample from a healthy control.
  • a level of a biomarker, relative to the control can be measured.
  • a difference in the level of a biomarker in the patient's sample relative to the control can be indicative of disease.
  • one or more biomarkers are analyzed in order to diagnose a patient with a disease.
  • the compositions and methods of the disclosure are particularly suited to identifying the presence or absence of, or determining expression levels, of a plurality of biomarkers in a sample.
  • compositions and methods herein can be used to determine a treatment plan for a patient.
  • the presence or absence of a biomarker may indicate that a patient is responsive to or refractory to a particular therapy.
  • a presence or absence of one or more biomarkers may indicate that a disease is refractory to a specific therapy and an alternative therapy can be administered.
  • a patient is currently receiving the therapy and the presence or absence of one or more biomarkers may indicate that the therapy is no longer effective.
  • data can be forwarded to a “remote location”, where “remote location,” means a location other than the location at which the image is examined.
  • a remote location could be another location (e.g., office, lab, etc.) in the same city, another location in a different city, another location in a different state, another location in a different country, etc.
  • office, lab, etc. another location in the same city
  • another location in a different city e.g., another location in a different city
  • another location in a different state e.g., another location in a different state
  • another location in a different country etc.
  • the two items can be in the same room but separated, or at least in different rooms or different buildings, and can be at least one mile, ten miles, or at least one hundred miles apart.
  • “Communicating” information references transmitting the data representing that information as electrical signals over a suitable communication channel (e.g., a private or public network).
  • “Forwarding” an item refers to any means of getting that item from one location to the next, whether by physically transporting that item or otherwise (where that is possible) and includes, at least in the case of data, physically transporting a medium carrying the data or communicating the data. Examples of communicating media include radio or infra-red transmission channels as well as a network connection to another computer or networked device, and the internet or including email transmissions and information recorded on websites and the like.
  • the image may be analyzed by an MD or other qualified medical professional, and a report based on the results of the analysis of the image may be forwarded to the patient from which the sample was obtained.
  • the method may be employed in a variety of diagnostic, drug discovery, and research applications that include, but are not limited to, diagnosis or monitoring of a disease or condition (where the image identifies a marker for the disease or condition), discovery of drug targets (where the a marker in the image may be targeted for drug therapy), drug screening (where the effects of a drug are monitored by a marker shown in the image), determining drug susceptibility (where drug susceptibility is associated with a marker) and basic research (where is it desirable to measure the differences between cells in a sample).
  • diagnosis or monitoring of a disease or condition where the image identifies a marker for the disease or condition
  • discovery of drug targets where the a marker in the image may be targeted for drug therapy
  • drug screening where the effects of a drug are monitored by a marker shown in the image
  • determining drug susceptibility where drug susceptibility is associated with a marker
  • basic research where is it desirable to measure the differences between cells in a sample).
  • two different samples may be compared using the above methods.
  • the different samples may be composed of an “experimental” sample, i.e., a sample of interest, and a “control” sample to which the experimental sample may be compared.
  • the different samples are pairs of cell types or fractions thereof, one cell type being a cell type of interest, e.g., an abnormal cell, and the other a control, e.g., normal, cell. If two fractions of cells are compared, the fractions are usually the same fraction from each of the two cells. In certain embodiments, however, two fractions of the same cell may be compared.
  • Exemplary cell type pairs include, for example, cells isolated from a tissue biopsy (e.g., from a tissue having a disease such as colon, breast, prostate, lung, skin cancer, or infected with a pathogen etc.) and normal cells from the same tissue, usually from the same patient; cells grown in tissue culture that are immortal (e.g., cells with a proliferative mutation or an immortalizing transgene), infected with a pathogen, or treated (e.g., with environmental or chemical agents such as peptides, hormones, altered temperature, growth condition, physical stress, cellular transformation, etc.), and a normal cell (e.g., a cell that is otherwise identical to the experimental cell except that it is not immortal, infected, or treated, etc.); a cell isolated from a mammal with a cancer, a disease, a geriatric mammal, or a mammal exposed to a condition, and a cell from a mammal of the same species, preferably from the same family, that is healthy
  • cells of different types e.g., neuronal and non-neuronal cells, or cells of different status (e.g., before and after a stimulus on the cells) may be employed.
  • the experimental material is cells susceptible to infection by a pathogen such as a virus, e.g., human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), etc.
  • the control material is cells resistant to infection by the pathogen.
  • the sample pair is represented by undifferentiated cells, e.g., stem cells, and differentiated cells.
  • the images produced by the method may be viewed side-by-side or, in some embodiments, the images may be superimposed or combined.
  • the images may be in color, where the colors used in the images may correspond to the labels used.
  • Cells any organism, e.g., from bacteria, yeast, plants and animals, such as fish, birds, reptiles, amphibians and mammals may be used in the subject methods.
  • mammalian cells i.e., cells from mice, rabbits, primates, or humans, or cultured derivatives thereof, may be used.
  • the invention also provides a computer system that is configured to implement the methods of the disclosure.
  • the system can include a computer server (“server”) that is programmed to implement the methods described herein.
  • FIG. 21 depicts a system 1600 adapted to enable a user to detect, analyze, and process images of samples.
  • the system 1600 includes a central computer server 1601 that is programmed to implement exemplary methods described herein.
  • the server 1601 includes a central processing unit (CPU, also “processor”) 1605 which can be a single core processor, a multi core processor, or plurality of processors for parallel processing.
  • the server 1601 also includes memory 1610 (e.g. random access memory, read-only memory, flash memory); electronic storage unit 1615 (e.g. hard disk); communications interface 1620 (e.g.
  • the memory 1610 , storage unit 1615 , interface 1620 , and peripheral devices 1625 are in communication with the processor 1605 through a communications bus (solid lines), such as a motherboard.
  • the storage unit 1615 can be a data storage unit for storing data.
  • the server 1601 is operatively coupled to a computer network (“network”) 1630 with the aid of the communications interface 1620 .
  • the network 1630 can be the Internet, an intranet and/or an extranet, an intranet and/or extranet that is in communication with the Internet, a telecommunication or data network.
  • the network 1630 in some cases, with the aid of the server 1601 , can implement a peer-to-peer network, which may enable devices coupled to the server 1601 to behave as a client or a server.
  • a microscope can be a peripheral device 1625 or a remote computer system 1640 .
  • the storage unit 1615 can store files, such as individual images, time lapse images, data about individual cells, data about individual biomarkers, images showing a pattern of binding of capture agents to a sample, or any aspect of data associated with the invention.
  • the data storage unit 1615 may be coupled with data relating to locations of cells in a virtual grid.
  • the server can communicate with one or more remote computer systems through the network 1630 .
  • the one or more remote computer systems may be, for example, personal computers, laptops, tablets, telephones, Smart phones, or personal digital assistants.
  • system 1600 includes a single server 1601 .
  • system includes multiple servers in communication with one another through an intranet, extranet and/or the Internet.
  • Methods as described herein can be implemented by way of machine (e.g., computer processor) computer readable medium (or software) stored on an electronic storage location of the server 1601 , such as, for example, on the memory 1610 , or electronic storage unit 1615 .
  • the code can be executed by the processor 1605 .
  • the code can be retrieved from the storage unit 1615 and stored on the memory 1610 for ready access by the processor 1605 .
  • the electronic storage unit 1615 can be precluded, and machine-executable instructions are stored on memory 1610 .
  • the code can be executed on a second computer system 1640 .
  • aspects of the systems and methods provided herein can be embodied in programming.
  • Various aspects of the technology may be thought of as “products” or “articles of manufacture” typically in the form of machine (or processor) executable code and/or associated data that is carried on or embodied in a type of machine readable medium (e.g., computer readable medium).
  • Machine-executable code can be stored on an electronic storage unit, such memory (e.g., read-only memory, random-access memory, flash memory) or a hard disk.
  • “Storage” type media can include any or all of the tangible memory of the computers, processors or the like, or associated modules thereof, such as various semiconductor memories, tape drives, disk drives and the like, which may provide non-transitory storage at any time for the software programming. All or portions of the software may at times be communicated through the Internet or various other telecommunication networks. Such communications, for example, may enable loading of the software from one computer or processor into another, for example, from a management server or host computer into the computer platform of an application server.
  • another type of media that may bear the software elements includes optical, electrical, and electromagnetic waves, such as used across physical interfaces between local devices, through wired and optical landline networks and over various air-links.
  • a machine readable medium such as computer-executable code
  • Non-volatile storage media can include, for example, optical or magnetic disks, such as any of the storage devices in any computer(s) or the like, such may be used to implement the system.
  • Tangible transmission media can include: coaxial cables, copper wires, and fiber optics (including the wires that comprise a bus within a computer system).
  • Carrier-wave transmission media may take the form of electric or electromagnetic signals, or acoustic or light waves such as those generated during radio frequency (RF) and infrared (IR) data communications.
  • RF radio frequency
  • IR infrared
  • Computer-readable media therefore include, for example: a floppy disk, a flexible disk, hard disk, magnetic tape, any other magnetic medium, a CD-ROM, DVD, DVD-ROM, any other optical medium, punch cards, paper tame, any other physical storage medium with patterns of holes, a RAM, a ROM, a PROM and EPROM, a FLASH-EPROM, any other memory chip or cartridge, a carrier wave transporting data or instructions, cables, or links transporting such carrier wave, or any other medium from which a computer may read programming code and/or data.
  • Many of these forms of computer readable media may be involved in carrying one or more sequences of one or more instructions to a processor for execution.
  • results of the sample staining or labeling can be presented to a user with the aid of a user interface, such as a graphical user interface.
  • kits can comprise any number of compositions to perform the methods of the disclosure, each of which have been described herein.
  • a kit may comprise at least one capture agent.
  • the capture agent can be an antibody, an aptamer, or an oligonucleotide probe.
  • the capture agent can be custom-made to specifically bind to a desired target.
  • a user may custom-order one or more capture agents to be included in the kit.
  • the capture agents can be sold separately.
  • the capture agents can specifically bind to a target molecule of interest. Additionally or alternatively, capture agents can be ordered as a panel (i.e., a pre-determined selection of capture agents).
  • the panel can be specific for a particular type of disease (e.g., cancer) or a particular sub-type of a disease (e.g., colon cancer).
  • a kit of the disclosure can also include one or more oligonucleotides.
  • the oligonucleotides can comprise a first strand and a double strand, as described herein.
  • the oligonucleotides can be provided as single-stranded oligonucleotides or as double-stranded oligonucleotides.
  • the kit can include reagents and/or instructions for annealing the first strand and the second strand of oligonucleotides to produce double-stranded oligonucleotides.
  • the single- or double-stranded oligonucleotides can be conjugated to the capture agents or can be provided unconjugated.
  • reagents can be included in the kit for conjugating the double-stranded oligonucleotides to the capture agents (e.g., reagents to perform Click chemistry).
  • the kit may provide a plurality of oligonucleotides wherein each of the first strands is the same and each of the second strands is different.
  • the kit can further comprise any nucleotide mixture disclosed herein. Nucleotide mixtures can comprise any combination of fluorescent nucleotides, unlabeled nucleotides, reversible terminator nucleotides, and the like.
  • the nucleotide mixture provided in the kit will be compatible with the provided oligonucleotides.
  • the kit can further comprise, without limitation, a polymerase for performing primer extension, a reagent for inactivating a signal (e.g., TCEP), a blocking solution (e.g., iodoacetamide solution), and any buffer or solution suitable to perform the methods herein.
  • the kit can comprise any reagent for preparing a sample for labeling such as a fixative (e.g., formaldehyde) or reagents for embedding a sample (i.e., paraffin wax).
  • the kit can further comprise a control sample for comparison with a test sample.
  • the control sample can be a healthy sample or a diseased sample.
  • the control sample may be matched to the tissue or cell type under investigation or to the disease being studied. In some cases, the control sample may be a positive control or a negative control.
  • a method for analyzing a planar sample comprises: (a) incubating the planar sample with a capture agent under conditions by which the capture agent specifically binds to complementary sites in the planar sample, wherein: (i) the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide that comprises a first strand and a second strand; (ii) the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide by the 5′ end of the first strand; and (iii) the 3′ end of the first strand is recessed relative to the 5′ end of the second strand, thereby producing an overhang; (b) crosslinking the capture agent to planar sample; (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix, thereby adding one or more nucleotides to the overhang; and/or contacting the planar sample with a mixture of short oligonucleotides, some of which may be
  • step (c) may comprise contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises a fluorescent nucleotide, thereby adding the fluorescent nucleotide to the overhang, or contacting to planar sample with one or more fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides, thereby adding a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide to the overhang; and step (d) comprises reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotide or oligonucleotide to the overhang.
  • the fluorescent signal may be: emitted directly from the added nucleotide or oligonucleotide, a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two fluorescent nucleotides that are added to the overhang or a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between a first fluorescent nucleotide added to overhang and a second fluorescent nucleotide that is present in the second strand.
  • extension of the first strand removes a quencher from a quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the second strand, downstream from the first strand.
  • the sample may be a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded (FFPE) section.
  • FFPE formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded
  • a capture agent that is linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide, wherein: (i) the double-stranded oligonucleotide comprises a first strand and a second strand; (ii) the capture agent is linked to the 5′ end of the first strand; and (iii) the 3′ end of the first strand is recessed relative to the 5′ end of the second strand, thereby producing an overhang or (iiii) the 5′ end is recessed relative to the 3′ end of the second strand, there producing and overhang
  • a capture agent composition comprising a plurality of capture agents that recognize different complementary sites, wherein: each of the capture agents is linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide that comprises a first strand and a second strand; the capture agents are linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide by the 5′ end of first strand; the 3′ end of the first strand in each of the double-stranded oligonucleotides is recessed relative to the 5′ end of the second strand, thereby producing an overhang; and the overhang is different for each of the capture agents.
  • the 5′ end is recessed relative to the 3′ end of the second strand, there producing and overhang that is specific to each capture agent.
  • the sequence of the first strand may be the same for each of the capture agents; and the sequence of the second strand may be different for each of the capture agents.
  • the overhangs may be of the formula 3′-N 4n N 1 /N 2 /N 3 , wherein N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more, or the formula 3′-YN 1 /N 2 -5′, optionally followed by short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of bases N 3 and N 4 , and wherein N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • a method for analyzing a tissue sample may comprise (a) incubating a planar sample with a capture agent composition of a prior embodiment under conditions by which the capture agents specifically bind to sites in the planar sample; (b) crosslinking capture agents to planar sample; (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and either an incomplete nucleotide mix or a nucleotide mix that comprises a reversible terminator nucleotide and/or a ligase and a labeled oligonucleotide; and (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition a nucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents.
  • the method may comprise: (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and: (i) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , N 2 and N 3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 or (ii) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , and N 2 , an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N 3 , and no nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 , thereby adding fluorescent nucleotides onto the double-stranded oligonucleotides of some but not all of the capture agents.
  • This step can also be done by ligation, i.e., by contacting the planar sample with a labeled oligonucleotide (or a mixture of the same), where addition of the labeled oligonucleotide depends on the underlying sequence of the overhang.
  • This method also comprises: (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition of a fluorescent nucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents.
  • the overhangs may be of the formula 3′-N 4n N 1 /N 2 /N 3 , wherein N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more; and step (c) comprises contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N 1 , N 2 and N 3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 .
  • This step can also be implemented by addition of a labeled oligonucleotide using a ligase.
  • the method may comprise (e) inactivating the fluorescent signal, deprotecting the reversible terminator nucleotide and blocking the sample; and (f) repeating steps (c) and (d).
  • step (f) may comprise repeating steps (c), (d) and (e) multiple times.
  • the overhangs may be of the formula 3′-YN 1 /N 2 -5′, optionally followed by short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of bases N 3 and N 4 , and wherein N 1 , N 2 , N 3 and N 4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • the method may further comprise (e) inactivating the fluorescent signal and contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N 4 ; and (f) repeating steps (c) and (d).
  • step (f) may comprise repeating steps (c), (d) and (e) multiple times.
  • the double-stranded oligonucleotides each comprise a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide hybridized to the second strand downstream from first strand, wherein the fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide comprises a quencher and extension of the first strand removes the quencher from some but not all of the quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some but not all of the capture agents.
  • Spleen cells fixed in 2% formaldehyde, permeablized and stored in methanol at ⁇ 80 were spun from methanol, resuspended and washed with buffer 4 (10 mM Tris &. 5, 10 mM MgCl2, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton ⁇ 100) for 5 min on a rotator.
  • buffer 4 10 mM Tris &. 5, 10 mM MgCl2, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton ⁇ 100
  • the fluorophores were cleaved off cells by incubation in 50 mM TCEP for 2 min in buffer 405E (10 mM Tris 7.5, 0.5M NaCl, 0.1% Triton ⁇ 100, 5 mM EDTA). After cleavage cells were washed in 405E and blocked for for 1 min in iodoacetamide solution (FRESHLY made 100 mM iodoacetamide in buffer 405E). The blocking solution was removed by two washes with buffer#4. Before proceeding to next cycle cells were again imaged by confocal microscopy. Even cycles (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14) were performed same as odd cycles except for substitution of dG with dA in labeling step and extension of cleavage to 4 min at room temperature.
  • buffer 405E 10 mM Tris 7.5, 0.5M NaCl, 0.1% Triton ⁇ 100, 5 mM EDTA.
  • FRESHLY made 100 mM iodoacet
  • FIG. 11 To explore the possibility of in situ staining by primer extension expression of CD4 was visualized in mouse spleen cells in suspension ( FIG. 11 ) or immobilized on a slide. ( FIG. 12 ).
  • T lymphocytes To visualize the T lymphocytes spleen cells were co-stained with conventional TcrB-Ax488 antibody. Both samples were stained with CD4 antibody conjugated to oligonucleotide duplex as in ( FIG. 11 A). No Klenow polymerase was added in control samples which results in no separation of TcrB positive T-cells into subsets ( FIG. 11 B). When Klenow polymerase was supplied.
  • CD4 positive T-cells could be observed as a Cy5 positive subset of TcrB positive T-cells ( FIG. 11 C and FIG. 12 ). Clear membrane staining pattern was observed by confocal imaging of cells stained on-slide ( FIG. 12 A). Taken together this data shows that on-slide primer extension reaction can be used for rendering the capture
  • FIG. 11 Flow cytometric analysis of mouse spleen cells stained by primer extension.
  • Mouse spleen cells were fixed and permeabilized with methanol as done for intracellular protein staining
  • Cells were co-stained with conventional TcrB-Ax488 antibody and CD4 antibody conjugated to oligonucleotide duplex as in (A). After staining cells were either incubated in extension buffer with dUTP-Cy5 without (B) or with (C) Klenow exo ⁇ polymerase.
  • TcrB positive T-cells in (B) are indicated by Ax-488 staining Dependent upon the addition of Klenow, TcrB positive CD4 positive T-cells are seen as a Cy5 positive subset of TcrB positive T-cells in (C).
  • FIG. 12 On-slide analysis of mouse spleen cells stained by primer extension. Mouse spleen cells were fixed and permeabilized with methanol as done for intracellular protein staining Cells were attached to poly-Lysine coated slide and co-stained with conventional TcrB-Ax488 antibody and CD4 antibody conjugated to oligonucleotide duplex as in FIG. 12 A. After staining, cells were incubated in extension buffer with dUTP-Cy5 Klenow exo ⁇ polymerase and visualized by confocal microscopy. Shown are DIC image in C, Cy5 channel in A, Ax488 channel in B and merged Ax488 and Cy5 channels in D.
  • TcrB-Ax488 positive T-cells in (B) are rendered Cy5 positive CD4 positive T-cells by primer extension as seen in (A).
  • the membrane pattern of CD4 points to specificity of staining by primer extension as it takes place at a particular expected subcellular localization.
  • CD4 and CD8 were co-analyzed in mouse spleen cells immobilized on a slide by Method 1 and, specifically, the multiplexing approach based on “reversible terminators”.
  • the cells were simultaneously stained by CD4 and CD8 antibodies conjugated to oligonucleotide duplexes as in ( FIG. 14 , A) simultaneously.
  • Two cycles of rendering were performed such that CD8 was visualized in the first cycle ( FIG. 14 , C) and CD4 in the second ( FIG. 14 , D).
  • Cells were counterstained with TcrB-Ax488 to delineate T-lynphocytes in the spleen cells.
  • CD4 positive cells were rendered as a subset of TcrB positive T-cells mutually exclusive with CD8-positive subset of T-lymphocytes (FIG. 14 , A-D).
  • the data suggests that rendering antibody staining by polymer (DNA-duplex) extension is an approach enabling sensitive antigen detection and multiplexing.
  • FIG. 13 Two cycle analysis of CD4 and CD8 staining in mouse spleen using Method 1 with reversible terminators.
  • Mouse spleen cells were fixed and permeabilized with methanol as done for intracellular protein staining
  • Cells were attached to poly-Lysine coated slide and co-stained with conventional TcrB-Ax488 antibody and a mixture of CD4 and CD8 antibodies conjugated to oligos as indicated on (A).
  • the cells were incubated in extension buffer with Illumina reversible terminators and Klenow exo ⁇ polymerase and visualized by confocal microscopy (C). Following the imaging after the first cycle, cells were destained by Illumina cleavage buffer containing TCEP.
  • the “missing base” multiplexing approach was tested on a model of heterogeneous tissue containing multiplicity of distinct cellular subsets ( FIG. 14 ).
  • leukocytes from homogenized mouse spleen were divided into 30 samples.
  • 30 different versions of CD45 were made by conjugating purified CD45 to common upper strand oligonucleotide and then separately annealing 30 different lower strand oligonucleotides designed to create overhangs that can be sequentially rendered (two per cycle) in the multiplexed version of “missing base approach”.
  • the samples were individually stained (barcoded) by 30 CD45 antibody conjugates, the unbound CD45 was washed off the barcoded samples were mixed and attached to a slide.
  • Mouse CD45 antibody was chemically conjugated to an “upper strand” oligonucleotide (oligonucleotide id-146). The conjugated antibody was further divided and separately annealed (by 30 min co-incubation at 40 C) to 30 different “lower strand” oligonucleotides—thus effectively creating 30 different species of CD45 antibody.
  • the 30 “lower strand” oligonucleotides were designed in accordance with “missing base” strategy and in addition in such a way that 2 antibodies could be rendered per cycle using two bases (dUTP and dCTP) reversibly (through s-s linker) coupled with distinct fluorophores (Cy5 and Cy3).
  • 30 samples of homogenized mouse spleen have been “barcoded” with these CD45-oligonucleotide duplex complexes such way that majority of cells in each sample became labeled with a particular CD45-upper/lower oligonucleotide combination. Following staining and washing the samples were combined to mimic a tissue with 30 different cellular subsets. The mixture was smeared on a slide and rendered by cycling staining with a “missing base” approach such that two subsets per staining cycle were co-visualized on different imaging channels.
  • Rat anti-mouse B220 antibody conjugate to oligonucleotide 146v2 was prepared as described. The conjugate were hybridized to a padlock oligonucleotide (PatgctaccgttAATTATTACTGAAACATACACTAAAGATAACATTA ttctgcaag; SEQ ID NO:125) that is designed to form a circular hybrid on 146v2.
  • Mouse spleen cells were stained with either of the conjugates and then those cells that were stained with the padlock construct were incubated with T4 RNA ligase (NEB) in manufacturer's ligation buffer at 37 C for 1 hour and then with phi29 polymerase and dNTP mix for 15 minutes.
  • T4 RNA ligase N4 RNA ligase
  • RCA product detection oligonucleotide TGAAACATACACTAAAGA; SEQ ID NO:126
  • cells were incubated with fluorescent dUTP-Cy5 (Jena Biosciences) was incorporated into the cells b incubating with 200 nM dUTP-Cy5 in buffer#4 and 1 ul of exo ⁇ Klenow polymerase (Thermo Scientific).
  • An aliquot of cells was left out and not subject to the rolling circle amplification (RCA) step and then used as a reference to assess the effect of RCA on staining.
  • RCA rolling circle amplification
  • FIG. 16 panels A-E schematically illustrate this method.
  • FIG. 16 panels F-G shows that the cells staining with the rolling circle amplification is much stronger than without it.
  • Antibody conjugates were prepared using the following protocol. Antibodies were subject to partial reduction of disulfide by 30 min incubation at room temperature with TCEP (final concentration 1 mM) in PBS pH 7.4. The antibodies were purified from TCEP by buffer exchange on BioGel P-30 spin-columns saturated with conjugation buffer (PBS pH 7.0). Oligonucleotide 146v2 (5′Maleimide-ATAGCAGTCCAGCCGAACGGTA GCATCTTGCAGAA; SEQ ID NO:127) bearing a protected maleimide group were ordered from Trilink Inc.
  • v2_C_cycle1 SEQ ID NO: 128: TTTTGTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz v2_C_cycle2 SEQ ID NO: 129: TTTTGtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz v2_C_cycle3 SEQ ID NO: 130: TTTTGCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz v2_C_cycle4 SEQ ID NO: 131: TTTTGTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz v2_C_cycle5 SEQ ID NO: 132: TTTTGCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz v2_C_cycle6 SEQ ID NO: 133: TTTTGtttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz v2_C_cycle7 SEQ ID NO: 134: TTTTGcctttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz v2_C_cycle8 (SEQ ID NO
  • Mouse spleen and bone marrow cells were prepared according to standard procedure and fixed in 2% formaldehyde for 10 min at room temperature. Following fixation, cells were spun and either stored frozen at ⁇ 80 in PBS with 5% DMSO or permeabilized by incubation in ice-cold methanol for 10 min. and further stored at ⁇ 80° C. in methanol.
  • Coverslips with sections were dipped for 30 sec into ethanol pre-chilled to dry-ice temperature, and transferred to SME with 4% formaldehyde for 20 min. After that the fixed sections were washed twice in SM and further blocked in staining buffer for 30 min. Mouse spleen cells were stained in staining buffer for 2-3 h at room temperature with a mixture of conjugated antibodies taken at 0.2 ug of each antibody per 100 ul of solution. After staining cells were washed twice with SM05 (SM supplemented with NaCl up to 0.65M final concentration), then were allowed to adhere to poly-L-lysin coated coverslips and further fixed to coverslip surface by 20 min incubation with 5 mM BS3 crosslinker in PBS.
  • SM05 SM supplemented with NaCl up to 0.65M final concentration
  • Staining was rendered by iterative incubation with polymerase reaction mixes. In odd cycles (1, 3, 5 . . . )—cells were incubated for 2 min in G-mix (150 nM dG, 150 nM dUssCy5, 150 nM dCssCy3, 25 ul NEB exo ⁇ Klenow per ml in buffer 4); wash 3 times with 405 (buffet 4 without MgCl and supplemented with NaCl up to final 0.65M); photographed; incubated 2 min in 50 mM TCEP in buffer 405; washed twice with 405; photographed; incubated for 1 min in freshly made 100 mM iodoacetamide in buffer 405; washed three times with buffer 4.
  • G-mix 150 nM dG, 150 nM dUssCy5, 150 nM dCssCy3, 25 ul NEB exo ⁇ Klenow per ml in buffer 4
  • ABseq was used to explore the variety of cellular subsets in mouse spleen and bone marrow using 22-antibody panel. Isolated spleen and bone marrow cells were barcoded by whole cell staining with NHS-PacBlu and NHS-Ax-488 dyes, mixed, stained with a panel of 22 antibodies tagged with DNA duplexes, attached to slide and rendered by ABseq in 11 primer extension and imaging iterations ( FIG. 17 ). Conspicuously 22-color marker expression data on pseudocolored image bearing all marker expressing data proved to be impossible to parse visually due to proximity of colors in multi-color palette ( FIG. 17 , bottom right panel).
  • Antibody conjugation, cell staining and rendering was performed following the same experimental procedures as in section 4 (Co-detecting 22 antigens on dispersed spleen cells). Nine aliquots of spleen cells were stained separately with a different CD45 antibody-DNA conjugate. Conjugates for each panel were formed in the following way.
  • Panel1 CD45 conjugated to 146v2 (5′Maleimide- ATAGCAGTCCAGCCGAACGGTAGCATCTTGCAGAA (SEQ ID NO: 174) and forming a DNA duplex with: (SEQ ID NO: 150) 1.
  • TTTTATTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGG-dideoxyC SEQ ID NO: 151
  • TTTTAtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz-dideoxyC SEQ ID NO: 152
  • TTTTACtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz-dideoxyC Panel2 CD45 conjugated to 146v2-ddC(5′Maleimide- ATAGCAGTCCAGCCGAACGGTAGCATCTTGCAGAA-dideoxyC) (SEQ ID NO: 153) and forming a DNA duplex with: (SEQ ID NO: 154) 4. TTTTAGCGATTAAGCGTGAACTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGG- dideoxyC (SEQ ID NO: 155) 5. TTTTAtGCGATTAAGCGTGAACTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGG z-dideoxyC (SEQ ID NO: 156) 6.
  • Panel3 CD45 conjugated to 146v2-ddC(5′Maleimide- ATAGCAGTCCAGCCGAACGGTAGCATCTTGCAGAA-dideoxyC) (SEQ ID NO: 157) and forming a DNA duplex with: (SEQ ID NO: 158) 7.
  • TTTTACGCTAATTCGCACTTGTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGG- dideoxyC SEQ ID NO: 159) 8.
  • TTTTAtCGCTAATTCGCACTTGTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGG z-dideoxyC SEQ ID NO: 160
  • Antigen staining was rendered in the following sequence of incubations: dGTP+dUTP-Cy5->dATP+dUTP-Cy5->dGTP+dUTP-Cy5->Incubation with luM spacer1 (GTTCACGCTTAATCGC; SEQ ID NO:161) in buffer#4 for 20 minutes->dGTP+dUTP-Cy5->dATP+dUTP-Cy5->dGTP+dUTP-Cy5->Incubation with luM spacer2 (CGCTAATTCGCACTTG; SEQ ID NO:162) in buffer#4 for 20 minutes->dGTP+dUTP-Cy5->dATP+dUTP-Cy5->dGTP+dUTP-Cy5. Imaging, fluorophore inactivation with 50 mM TCEP pH 7.0 and background blocking with iodoacetamide were performed after each step of rendering.
  • NALM and Jurkat cell lines were grown to a density of 1 million/ml, fixed with 1.6% formaldehyde for 10 minutes and then transferred to ice-cold methanol.
  • An aliquot of 200K cells was washed with PBSTR (PBS, 0.1% Tween-20 and 1:1000 Rnasin) and transferred to a hybridization buffer (1 ⁇ SSC, 10% formamide, 10% vanadyl-ribonucleotide complex, 10% polyvinylsulfonic acid).
  • DNA probe mixture was added to the final concentration of 100 nM and incubated at 40 C for 1 hour.
  • cells were transferred to amplification solution (1 ul of phi29 polymerase (Thermo Scientific), 5 ul of 10 ⁇ polymerase buffer (Thermo Scientific), 1 ul of 10 mM dNTP mix, 43 ul of H2O) and incubated at 30 C for 1 h.
  • amplification solution (1 ul of phi29 polymerase (Thermo Scientific), 5 ul of 10 ⁇ polymerase buffer (Thermo Scientific), 1 ul of 10 mM dNTP mix, 43 ul of H2O) and incubated at 30 C for 1 h.
  • Cells were washed with PBSTR and incubated with 1 mM “RCA detection” oligonucleotide for 10 minutes at 37 C and transferred to Sequencing buffer (10 mM Tris pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCl2, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton ⁇ 100, 1:50 Klenow polymerase (Thermo Scientific), 200 mM dUTP-Cy5 (Jena Biosciences)). Cells were washed twice with high salt wash buffer (10 mM Tris pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCl2, 650 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton ⁇ 100) and imaged using a florescent microscope.
  • Sequencing buffer 10 mM Tris pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCl2, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton ⁇ 100, 1:50 Klenow polymerase (Thermo Scientific), 200 mM dUTP-Cy5 (Jena Biosciences)
  • HLA-DR padlock1 (SEQ ID NO: 163) PACATTAaaatcctagcacagggactcAATTATTACTGAAACATACACTA AAGATApa HLA-DR splint-primer1 (SEQ ID NO: 164) ctcatcagcacagctatgatgaTAATGTTATCTT HLA-DR padlock2 (SEQ ID NO: 165) PACATTAtagaactcggcctggatgatAATTATTACTGAAACATACACTA AAGATA HLA-DR splint-primer2 (SEQ ID NO: 166) ctgattggtcaggattcagaTAATGTTATCTT HLA-DR padlock3 (SEQ ID NO: 167) PACATTAtcaaagctggcaaatcgtccAATTATTACTGAAACATACACTA AAGATA HLA-DR splint-primer2 (SEQ ID NO: 168) tggccaatgcaccttgagccTAATGTTATC
  • a signal amplification system was designed based on proximity ligation and rolling circle amplification (RCA). Five pairs of probes were designed in a way that the two oligos of each pair were complementary to directly adjacent 20-nt stretches of HLADRA mRNA and that the 3′ region of the upstream oligonucleotide served as a splint for circularization of the downstream padlock oligonucleotide ( FIG.

Abstract

A method for analyzing planar sample is provided. In some cases the method comprises: (a) labelling the planar sample with a capture agent that is linked to a nucleic acid, wherein the capture agent specifically binds to complementary sites in the planar sample; (b) reading a fluorescent signal caused by extension of a primer that is hybridized to the nucleic acid, using fluorescence microscopy. Several implementations of the method, and multiplexed versions of the same, are also provided.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCING
  • This patent application claims the benefit of U.S. provisional application Ser. No. 62/015,799, filed Jun. 23, 2014, and U.S. non-provisional application Ser. No. 14/560,921, filed on Dec. 4, 2014, which patent applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties.
  • STATEMENT REGARDING FEDERALLY SPONSORED RESEARCH
  • This invention was made with Government support under contract W81XWH-12-1-0591 awarded by the Department of Defense and under contracts GM104148 and HHSN268201000034C awarded by the National Institutes of Health. The Government has certain rights in the invention.
  • BACKGROUND
  • Several major approaches have been used so far for single-cell antigen cytometry. Among the most popular are single cell PCR, fluorescence activated flow cytometry, mass cytometry and single cell sequencing. These (fluorescence and mass-based cytometry) approaches are limited from either inability to breach the multiplexing levels of more than 100 parameters per analyte (cell in this case) or from inability to achieve high throughput (single cell sequencing). Also these methods are not appropriate or readily modified to enable cell multiplexed analysis of archived tissues and slide based samples.
  • Disclosed herein are several related methods for capture agent detection that are based on labeling the capture agent with DNA and subsequent detection of this DNA by primer extension.
  • SUMMARY
  • A method for analyzing a planar sample is provided. In certain embodiments, the method may comprise: (a) labeling the planar sample (e.g., a tissue section) with a capture agent (e.g., an antibody or an oligonucleotide probe) in a way that produces a labeled sample in which: (i) the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand; and (ii) the 3′ end or 5′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template; (b) contacting the labeled sample with i. a polymerase and a nucleotide mix and/or ii. a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase, thereby adding one or more nucleotides and/or a labeled oligonucleotide to an one of the strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and (c) reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the one or more nucleotides and/or oligonucleotide to one of the strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid using fluorescence microscopy, thereby producing an image showing the pattern of binding of the capture agent to the planar sample.
  • The method may be implemented in a variety of different ways. For example, in some embodiments, step (b) may contacting the labeled sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises a fluorescent nucleotide, thereby adding the fluorescent nucleotide to one of the strands (i.e., the top strand or the bottom strand, whichever strand has the extendible 3′ end) of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and step (c) may comprise reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotide to one of the strands (i.e., the top strand or the bottom strand, whichever strand has the extendible 3′ end) of the double-stranded nucleic acid. In this embodiment, the fluorescent signal may: i. emitted directly from the added nucleotide; ii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two fluorescent nucleotides that are added to a 3′ end of one of the strands; or iii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between a first added fluorescent nucleotide (i.e., a fluorescent nucleotide that has been added to one of the strands) and a second fluorescent nucleotide that is already present in one of the strands.
  • In alternative embodiments, step (b) comprises contacting the labeled sample with a ligase and a labeled oligonucleotide, thereby adding the labeled oligonucleotide to the 3′ or 5′ end of one of the strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and step (c) comprises reading a fluorescent signal generated by ligation of the labeled oligonucleotide to one of the strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid. In some cases, an extendible 3′ end may be extended by a polymerase, and ligated to a labeled oligonucleotide. In these embodiments, the fluorescent signal may be: i. emitted directly from the added nucleotide; ii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two fluorescent nucleotides that are added to one of the strands; or iii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between a first fluorescent nucleotide added one of the strands and a second fluorescent nucleotide that is already present in the other strand.
  • In some embodiments, extension of one of the strands removes a quencher from a quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the other strand, downstream from the first strand.
  • In some embodiments, the first strand is a rolling circle amplification (RCA) product, and the second strand comprises oligonucleotides that are hybridized to multiple sites in the RCA product.
  • In other embodiments, the first strand is an oligonucleotide, and the second strand is a second oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the first oligonucleotide. In these embodiments, the oligonucleotides may be designed to produce a 5′ overhang such that the 3′ end of the first strand oligonucleotide is extendible using the other oligonucleotide as a template. In other embodiments, the oligonucleotides may be designed to produce a 3′ overhang such that the 5′ end of the first strand oligonucleotide is extendible by ligation, using the other oligonucleotide as a template
  • In any embodiment, the planar sample may be a tissue section, e.g., a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue section.
  • Also provided herein is a capture agent that is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid, wherein: (i) the double-stranded nucleic acid comprises a first strand and a second strand; (ii) the capture agent is linked to the first strand; and (iii) the 3′ end or 5′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template.
  • Also provided herein is a capture agent composition comprising a plurality of capture agents that recognize different complementary sites, wherein: each of the capture agents is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand; the capture agents are linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid by the first strand; the 3′ end or 5′ end of the first or second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template; and the templates immediately downstream of the extendible ends are different for each of the capture agents. In these embodiments, the sequence of the first strand is the same for each of the capture agents; and the sequence of the second strand is different for each of the capture agents.
  • In embodiments that use a reversible terminator (“reversible terminator” approach), the templates immediately adjacent to the template at the extendible 3′ end may be of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3-5′ optionally followed by short stretch (e.g., 1-5 residues) of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, where N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 0, 1 or more. In some cases, the population contains single nucleotide overhangs of nucleotides N1, N2 and N3 or the population of overhangs comprises two nucleotide overhangs of sequence 3′-N1N1-5′, 3′-N4N2-5′ and 3′-N4N3-5′-5′ and, optionally overhangs of sequence, 3′-N4N4N1-5′, 3′-N4N4N2-5′ and 3′-N4N4N3-5′ and so on (e.g., four nucleotide overhangs of sequence 3′-N4N4N4N1-5′, 3′-N4N4N4N2-5′ and 3′-N4N4N4N3-5′). A population of oligonucleotides or RCA products having sequences that are defined by any of these formulas is also provided. In RCA embodiments, the sequence may be found in each repeat of an RCA product.
  • In these embodiments, the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end may be of a more general formula 3′-XN1/N2/N3-5′, where N1, N2, N3 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and X is a nucleotide stretch of bases Xi (such that Xi are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C) of random composition and length. In some cases, the population may comprise comprises two nucleotide overhangs of sequence 3′-X1N1-5′, 3′-X1N2-5′ and 3′-X1N3-5′ and, optionally overhangs of sequence, 3′-N1X1X2-5′, 3′-N2X1X2-5′ and 3′-N3X1X2-5′ and so on (e.g., four nucleotide overhangs of sequence 3′-N1X1X2X3-5′, 3′-N2X1X2X3-5′ and 3′-N3X1X2X3-5′). In many embodiments, this population additionally contains single nucleotide overhangs of nucleotides N1, N2 and N3. A population of oligonucleotides or RCA products having sequences that are defined by any of these formulas is also provided. In RCA embodiments, the sequence may be found in each repeat of an RCA product.
  • In embodiments that rely on a “missing base” approach, the template immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end may be of the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by short stretch (e.g., 1-5 residues) of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of bases N3 and N4, wherein nucleotide N3 is in odd positions and nucleotide N4 is in even positions, counting from the start of the overhang and N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C. For example, in some cases, the population may comprise 5′ overhangs of sequence 3′-N1-5′ and 3′-N2-5′ or optionally 3′-N3N1-5′ and 3′-N3N2-5′ or 3′-N3N4N1-5′ and 3′-N3N4N2-5′ and, optionally, overhangs of sequence 3′-N3N4N3N1-5′ and 3′-N3N4N3N2-5′ and so on (e.g., overhangs of sequence 3′-N3N4N3N4N1-5′ and 3′-N3N4N3N4N2-5′ and then 3′-N3N4N3N4N3N1-5′ and 3′-N3N4N3N4N3N2-5′). A population of oligonucleotides or RCA products having sequences that are defined by any of these formulas is also provided. In RCA embodiments, the sequence may be found in each repeat of an RCA product.
  • In these embodiments the template immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end may also be of a more general formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, wherein Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of alternating random length stretches of bases N3 and N4 such that the order number of N3— stretches is odd and of N4 stretches is even and wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C. For example, the population may comprise overhangs of sequence 3′-N1-5′ and 3′-N2-5′ or optionally 3′-N3N3N1-5′ and 3′-N3N3N2-5′ or 3′-N3N3N4N1-5′ and 3′-N3N3N4N2-5′ and, optionally, overhangs of sequence 3′-N3N3N3N3N4N4N3N3N3N1-5′ and 3′-N3N3N3N3N4N4N3N3N3N-5′ and so on). A population of oligonucleotides or RCA products having sequences that are defined by any of these formulas is also provided. In RCA embodiments, the sequence may be found in each repeat of an RCA product.
  • A method for analyzing a tissue sample is also provided. In these embodiments, the method may comprise (a) labeling a planar sample with the above-described capture agent composition; (b) contacting the labeled sample with i. a polymerase and either an incomplete nucleotide mix or a nucleotide mix that comprises a reversible terminator nucleotide and/or ii. a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase; and (c) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition a nucleotide or a labeled oligonucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents.
  • In these embodiments, the method may comprises: (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and: (i) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4 or (ii) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, and N2, an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N3, and no nucleotide that is complementary to N4, thereby adding fluorescent nucleotides onto the double-stranded nucleic acids of some but not all of the capture agents; and (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition of a fluorescent nucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents.
  • In some embodiments, the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end are of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more; and step (c) comprises contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4.
  • In some embodiments, this method may further comprise: (e) inactivating the fluorescent signal, deprotecting the reversible terminator nucleotide and blocking the sample; and (f) repeating steps (c) and (d). In some cases, step (f) may comprise repeating steps (c), (d) and (e) multiple times.
  • In some embodiments, the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end may be of the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by short stretch (e.g., 1-5 nucleotides) of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of bases N3 and N4, and wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • In these embodiments, the method may comprise (e) inactivating the fluorescent signal and contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N4; and (f) repeating steps (c) and (d). In certain cases, step (f) may comprise repeating steps (c), (d) and (e) multiple times.
  • In alternative embodiments, the double-stranded oligonucleotides may each comprise a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide hybridized to the second strand downstream from first strand, wherein the fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide comprises a quencher and extension of the first strand removes the quencher from some but not all of the quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some but not all of the capture agents.
  • In other embodiments, the capture agent is linked to a single stranded oligonucleotide, which can be either unlabeled or labeled with FRET acceptor fluorophore. Such a single stranded nucleotide incorporates a dedicated sequence that hybridizes to a complementary oligonucleotide which is to be extended with unlabeled base or with a base labeled with a FRET excitation fluorophore, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some but not all of the capture agents.
  • In some embodiments, a method for analyzing a planar sample. In some embodiments, the method comprises: (a) labeling the planar sample with a capture agent to produce a labeled sample, wherein: (i) the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand; and (ii) a 3′ end or 5′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template; (b) contacting the labeled sample with i. a polymerase and a plurality of nucleotides and/or ii. a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase, thereby adding one or more nucleotides of the plurality of nucleotides and/or a labeled oligonucleotide to an end of one of the strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and (c) reading a signal generated by addition of the one or more nucleotides and/or labeled oligonucleotide to one of the first strand or the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the signal may be a fluorescent signal. In some embodiments, the reading may comprises flourescence microscopy. Any embodiment, the method may further comprise producing an image showing the pattern of binding of the capture agent to the planar sample.
  • In any embodiment, step (b) may comprise contacting the labeled sample with a polymerase and a plurality of nucleotides that comprises a fluorescent nucleotide, thereby adding the fluorescent nucleotide to one of the first strand or the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and step (c) comprises reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotide to one of the first strand or the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid. In these embodiment, wherein the fluorescent signal may be: i. emitted directly from the added nucleotide; ii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two fluorescent nucleotides of the plurality of flourescent nucleotides that are added to one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid; or iii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between the added fluorescent nucleotide and a second fluorescent nucleotide that is present in one of the first strand or second strand double-stranded nucleic acid.
  • In any embodiment, the method step (b) may comprise contacting the labeled sample with a ligase and a labeled oligonucleotide, thereby adding the labeled oligonucleotide to one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and step (c) comprises reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the labeled oligonucleotide to one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid. In this embodiment, the fluorescent signal may be: i. emitted directly from the added labeled nucleotide; ii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two labeled nucleotides that are added to one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid; or iii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between the labeled nucleotide added to one of the first strand and second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid and a second labeled nucleotide that is present in the other strand. In these embodiments, the labeled nucleotide may comprise a fluorescent nucleotide.
  • In any embodiment, extension of one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid may remove a quencher from a quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the other strand, downstream from the first strand.
  • In any embodiment, the first strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid may be a rolling circle amplification (RCA) product, and the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid comprises oligonucleotides that are hybridized to multiple sites in the RCA product.
  • In any embodiment, the first strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid may be a first oligonucleotide, and the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid is a second oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the first oligonucleotide.
  • In any embodiment, the planar sample may be a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded (FFPE) section.
  • In any embodiment, the capture agent may be an antibody, an aptamer, or an oligonucleotide probe.
  • A capture agent that is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid is also provided. In some embodiments, (i) the double-stranded nucleic acid comprises a first strand and a second strand; (ii) the capture agent is linked to the first strand; and (iii) the 5′ end or the 3′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template.
  • Also provided is a capture agent composition comprising a plurality of capture agents that each recognize different complementary sites. In these embodiments, each of the plurality of capture agents may be linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand; the 5′ end or 3′ end of the first or second strand may be extendible using the other strand as a template; and the templates immediately downstream of the extendible ends may be different for each of the plurality of capture agents. In these embodiments, the sequence of the first strand may be the same for each of the plurality of capture agents; and the sequence of the second strand may be different for each of the plurality of capture agents.
  • In some embodiments, the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ ends may be of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more.
  • In some embodiments, the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ ends may be of the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by a short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of N3 and N4, and wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • A method for analyzing a planar sample is provided. This method may comprise (a) labeling the planar sample with a capture agent composition summarized above; (b) contacting the labeled sample with i. a polymerase and either an incomplete nucleotide mix or a nucleotide mix that comprises a reversible terminator nucleotide, thereby adding a nucleotide to the plurality of capture agents; and/or ii. a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase, thereby adding a labeled oligonucleotide to the plurality of capture agents; and (c) reading a signal generated by addition of the nucleotide or the labeled oligonucleotide to some but not all of the plurality of capture agents. In these embodiments, the signal may be a fluorescent signal. In some embodiments, the reading may be done by fluorescent microscopy.
  • In some embodiments, the method may be done by (b) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and: (i) a nucleotide mix that comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4; or (ii) a nucleotide mix that comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, and N2, an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N3, and no nucleotide that is complementary to N4, thereby adding fluorescent nucleotides onto the double-stranded nucleic acids of some but not all of the plurality of capture agents; and (c) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotides to the double-stranded nucleic acids of some but not all of the plurality of capture agents. In these embodiments, the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end may be of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more; and step (b) comprises contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4. In these embodiments, the method may further comprise: (d) inactivating the fluorescent signal, (e) optionally, deprotecting the reversible terminator nucleotide; (f) blocking the sample; and (g) repeating steps (b) and (c). In some embodiment, step (g) may comprise repeating steps (b)-(f) multiple times.
  • In some embodiments, the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end may be of the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by a short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of N3 and N4, and wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C. In these embodiments, the method may further comprise: (d) inactivating the fluorescent signal; (e) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N4; and (f) repeating steps (b) and (c). In some cases, step (f) may comprise repeating steps (b)-(e) multiple times.
  • In some embodiments, the double-stranded nucleic acids each comprise a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide hybridized to the second strand downstream from the first strand, wherein the fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide comprises a quencher and extension of the first strand removes the quencher from some but not all of the quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some but not all of the plurality of capture agents.
  • In some embodiments, extension of the double-stranded nucleic acid comprises contacting the planar sample with a mixture of labeled and unlabeled oligonucleotides and a ligase.
  • In any embodiment, the plurality of capture agents may be selected from the group consisting of: antibodies, aptamers, and oligonucleotide probes.
  • A kit is also provided. In these embodiments, the kit may comprise: (a) one or more capture agents, wherein the one or more capture agents can specifically bind to complementary sites in a planar sample. (b) one or more double-stranded nucleic acids comprising a first strand a second strand, wherein each of the one or more capture agents is linked to the double-stranded nucleic acid, and wherein a 5′ end or 3′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template. In some embodiments, the kit may further comprise a polymerase or ligase. In some embodiments, the kit may further comprise a nucleotide mix comprising at least one of a fluorescent nucleotide, an unlabeled nucleotide, and a reversible terminator nucleotide. In some embodiments, the one or more capture agents may be selected from the group consisting of: an antibody, an aptamer and an oligonucleotide probe.
  • In some aspects, a method is provided for analyzing a planar sample. In some cases, the method comprises incubating the planar sample with a capture agent under conditions by which the capture agent specifically binds to complementary sites in the planar sample. In some cases, the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide that comprises a first strand and a second strand. In some cases, a 3′ end of the first strand is recessed relative to a 5′ end of the second strand, thereby producing an overhang. In some cases, the method comprises contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a plurality of nucleotides, thereby adding one or more nucleotides of the plurality of nucleotides to the overhang. In some cases, the method comprises reading a signal generated by addition of the one or more nucleotides to the overhang. In some cases, the plurality of nucleotides comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides. In some cases, a fluorescent nucleotide of the plurality of nucleotides is added to the overhang. In some cases, the signal comprises a fluorescent signal. In some cases, the fluorescent signal is emitted directly from the fluorescent nucleotide added to the overhang. In other cases, two of the plurality of fluorescent nucleotides are added to the overhang. In this example, the fluorescent signal is a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between the two of the plurality of fluorescent nucleotides added to the overhang. In an alternative example, the fluorescent signal is a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between the fluorescent nucleotide from the plurality of fluorescent nucleotides added to the overhang and a fluorescent nucleotide that is present in the second strand. In some cases, extension of the first strand removes a quencher from a quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the second strand, downstream from the first strand. In some cases, the planar sample is a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded (FFPE) section. In some cases, the capture agent is linked to the double-stranded oligonucleotide by a 5′ end of the first strand. In other cases, the capture agent is linked to the double-stranded oligonucleotide by a 3′ end of the second strand. In some cases, the method further comprises crosslinking the capture agent to the planar sample. In some cases, the reading comprises fluorescence microscopy. In some cases, the method further comprises producing an image showing a pattern of binding of the capture agent to the planar sample. In some cases, the one or more nucleotides of the plurality of nucleotides is added to the overhang by primer extension. In some cases, the capture agent is an antibody, an aptamer or an oligonucleotide probe.
  • In some aspects, a composition is provided comprising a plurality of capture agents that specifically bind to different complementary sites in a planar sample. In some cases, each of the plurality of capture agents is linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide that comprises a first strand and a second strand. In some cases, a 3′ end of the first strand in each of the double-stranded oligonucleotides is recessed relative to a 5′ end of the second strand, thereby producing an overhang. In some cases, the overhang is different for each of the plurality of capture agents. In some cases, each of the plurality of capture agents is linked to the double-stranded oligonucleotide by a 5′ end of the first strand. In other cases, each of the plurality of capture agents is linked to the double-stranded oligonucleotide by a 3′ end of the second strand. In some cases, a sequence of the first strand is the same for each of the plurality of capture agents and a sequence of the second strand is different for each of the plurality of capture agents. In some cases, the overhang is of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more. In other cases, the overhang is of the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by a short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end of the first strand to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of N3 and N4, and wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C. In some cases, Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n and wherein n is 0, 1, or more. In some cases, the order number of N3 stretches is odd and wherein the order number of N4 stretches is even. In some cases, the planar sample is a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded section (FFPE). In some cases, the plurality of capture agents are antibodies, aptamers, or oligonucleotide probes.
  • In some aspects, a method is provided for analyzing a planar sample. In some cases, the method comprises incubating the planar sample with the composition described above under conditions by which each of the plurality of capture agents specifically bind to different complementary sites in the planar sample. In some cases, the method comprises contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a plurality of nucleotides, thereby adding one or more nucleotides of the plurality of nucleotides to the overhang of some, but not all, of the plurality of capture agents. In some cases, the method comprises reading a signal generated by addition of the one or more nucleotides from the plurality of nucleotides to the overhang of some, but not all, of the plurality of capture agents. In some cases, the method further comprises crosslinking the plurality of capture agents to the planar sample. In some cases, the plurality of nucleotides comprises an incomplete nucleotide mix or a nucleotide mix comprising a reversible terminator nucleotide. In some cases, the signal comprises a fluorescent signal. In some cases, the reading comprises fluorescence microscopy. In some cases, the method further comprises producing an image showing a pattern of binding of the plurality of capture agents to the planar sample. In some cases, the plurality of nucleotides comprises: (i) a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3, and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4; or (ii) a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1 and N2, an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N3, and no nucleotide that is complementary to N4. In some cases, a fluorescent nucleotide of the plurality of fluorescent nucleotides is added to the overhang of some, but not all, of the plurality of capture agents. In some cases, the signal comprises a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotide of the plurality of fluorescent nucleotides to some, but not all, of the plurality of capture agents. In some cases, the reading comprises fluorescence microscopy. In some cases, the method further comprises producing an image showing the pattern of binding of the plurality of capture agents to the planar sample. In some cases, the overhangs are of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more, and wherein the plurality of nucleotides comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2, N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4. In some cases, the method further comprises inactivating the fluorescent signal, optionally, deprotecting the reversible terminator nucleotide; blocking the planar sample; and repeating the steps of contacting and reading. In some cases, the repeating further comprises repeating the steps of contacting, reading, inactivating, optionally deprotecting, and blocking a plurality of times. In other cases, the overhangs are of the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by a short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end of the first strand to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of N3 and N4, and wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C. In some cases, Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n and wherein n is 0, 1, or more. In some cases, the order number of N3 stretches is odd and wherein the order number of N4 stretches is even. In some cases, the method further comprises inactivating the fluorescent signal, contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N4; and repeating the steps of contacting and reading. In some cases, the repeating comprises repeating the steps of contacting, reading, inactivating, and contacting a plurality of times. In some cases, each of the double-stranded oligonucleotides comprise a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide hybridized to the second strand downstream from the first strand, wherein the fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide comprises a quencher and extension of the first strand removes the quencher from some, but not all, of the quenched fluorescently-labeled oligonucleotides, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some, but not all, of the capture agents.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
  • The skilled artisan will understand that the drawings, described below, are for illustration purposes only. The drawings are not intended to limit the scope of the present teachings in any way.
  • FIG. 1A-1B (A) schematically illustrates a detection reagent composed of a combination of a capture agent that is conjugated to a double-stranded oligonucleotide. Upon detection and removal of unbound detection reagent the binding pattern is rendered by polymerase driven primer extension. Panel (B) schematically illustrates three approaches for linking the capture agent (an antibody in this case, but not excluding other possible capture agents) to a double stranded oligonucleotide (i.e., by chemical conjugation of the upper strand oligonucleotide to the capture agent; using streptavidin as an intermediate to connect biotinylated antibody and biotinylated oligonucleotide; and by linking biotinylated oligonucleotide to antibody chemically conjugated to streptavidin).
  • FIG. 2 schematically illustrates examples of capture agents that are bound to double-stranded oligonucleotides that have different overhangs. Such different overhangs represent a strategy to increase signal harvested from a particular capture agent by multiplication of positions in lower strand oligonucleotide complementary to detector base (dU in this case). The lower panel also shows how a different base labeled with a different fluorophore can be used as a FRET excitation pair for the “Detector” base. SEQ ID NOS: 1-4.
  • FIG. 3 schematically illustrates several cycles of a multiplexed detection method that relies on reversible dye terminators.
  • FIG. 4 schematically illustrates several cycles of a multiplexed detection method that relies on leaving out one of the four nucleotides per cycle.
  • FIG. 5A-5D schematically illustrates an exemplary design of oligonucleotide duplexes for “reversible terminator” and “missing base” multiplexing methods. SEQ ID NOS: 5-12.
  • FIG. 6 schematically illustrates an exemplary design of oligonucleotide duplexes for a strategy that allows one to reduce the length of the lower strand oligonucleotide, creating an overhang in the case of highly multiplexed capture agent panels. SEQ ID NOS: 13-30.
  • FIG. 7 schematically illustrates an example of a detection method that relies on removing a quencher from a labeled oligonucleotide by nick translation. SEQ ID NOS: 31-35.
  • FIG. 8 schematically illustrates a multiplexed detection method that relies on removing quenchers from labeled oligonucleotides. Step 1: SEQ ID NOS 36-44, Step 2: SEQ ID NOS: 45-52, Step 3: SEQ ID NOS: 53-60, Step 4: SEQ ID NOS: 61-67.
  • FIGS. 9A and 9B schematically illustrate an embodiment that relies on cyclical re-annealing of polymerase priming nucleotides and a variant of the same approach that utilizes FRET. SEQ ID NOS: 68-80.
  • FIG. 10 schematically illustrates an embodiment that relies on cyclical re-annealing of polymerase priming nucleotides and a variant of the same approach that utilizes FRET. SEQ ID NOS: 81-86.
  • FIGS. 11A-11C shows an anti-CD4 antibody linked to oligonucleotide duplex designed for rendering staining by primer extension (panel A) and data obtained from labeled population of spleen cells in suspension in the absence of polymerase (panel B) and in the presence of polymerase (panel C). SEQ ID NOS: 87 and 88.
  • FIGS. 12A-12D shows data obtained from labeling by primer extension a population of spleen cells preattached on the slide. Cells were co-stained with “regular” TCRb-FITC antibody and CD4 antibody linked to oligonucleotide duplex designed for rendering staining by primer extension.
  • FIGS. 13A-13D show schematic illustration of two capture agents CD4 and CD8 linked to oligonucleotide duplexes (panel A) and data obtained from a multiplexed method whereby staining by this capture agents was sequentially detected on spleen cells smeared on a slide using a “reversible terminator” method (panels C-D). SEQ ID NOS: 89-92.
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of an experiment testing multiplexed staining by “missing base” approach. Mouse spleen samples were barcoded by pan-leukocytic CD45 antibody conjugated to per sample specific oligonucleotide duplexes. Samples were mixed after staining and mixture was resolved by sequential rendering of CD45-oligonucleotide variants.
  • FIG. 15 is 12 panels of images showing the first 6 cycles of rendering the 30 populations barcoded by CD45 (as per scheme on FIG. 14). Two populations were co-detected per cycle of rendering. In each cycle control image was acquired after fluorescence inactivation.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates enhanced antibody signal with rolling circle amplification. A. Antibody-DNA conjugate that consists of an antibody, a covalently linked linear linker oligonucleotide and a 5′-phosphorylated padlock nucleotide is used to stain the cellular antigens. Padlock probe contains the detection primer sequence (orange) followed by the fluorescent nucleotide incorporation site (T). B. Padlock oligonucleotide is treated with T4 DNA ligase, inducing its circularization. C. Rolling circle amplification with strand-displacing phi29 DNA polymerase created repeats of the reverse-complement of the detection primer sites (green). F-G. Staining of Mouse Spleen cells with antibody-DNA conjugate visualized by primer extension with dUTP-Cy5 without the rolling circle amplification (F) and after rolling circle amplification (G).
  • FIG. 17 shows fluorescent images of cells, showing the staining of 22 different antigens rendered by the iterative primer extension protocol. At each cycle one antigen-antibody-DNA complex incorporates dUTP-SS-Cy5 fluorophore (red) and one complex incorporates dCTP-SS-Cy3 (green), all other complexes receive an unlabelled ‘walking’ base (dGTP on odd cycles, dATP on even cycles).
  • FIG. 18 shows A: multipanel design whereby antibody-DNA conjugates are incapable of polymerase extension because of 3′-dideoxy-terminator bases, but each panel can be activated for extension independently of others by an addition of a panel-specific primer. B: 18 aliquotes of mouse spleen cells were independently stained with different CD45 antibody conjugates that were designed such. Aliquots 1-3 (panel 1) can be detected by regular ABseq primer extension (top row), aliquots 4-6 (panel 2) were be extended after addition of Spacer1 oligonucleotide primer and aliquotes 7-9 (panel 3) can be extended after addition of Spacer2 oligonucleotide primer. C: Results of image quantification. Intensities of individual cell intensities displayed as a barcodes, one cell for each row, red color representing higher staining intensity. Columns represent intensities of cells on each extension cycle. The diagonal pattern shows the high specificity of spacer-based extension and the absence of signal cross-talk between panels and extension cycles.
  • FIG. 19 shows A: A pair of coincidence detection probes is hybridized to the target RNA. Upstream oligonucleotide probe (Splint-primer) serves as a splint for circularization and ligation of the downstream oligonucleotide probe (padlock). Padlock probe contains a detection primer sequence (lilac) followed by the fluorescent nucleotide incorporation site (red) B. Rolling circle amplification is initiated at the 3′ end of the upstream probe and creates multiple copies of the reverse-complement of detection primer sequence (lilac). C. Detection primer is annealed to the multiple sites of the amplification product. D. Polymerase reaction with dUTP-Cy5 results incorporations. E-F: small and bright puncta in NALM cells correspond to single HLADRA RNA molecules, which are absent in the negative control Jurkat cells. Large red blobs present in both panels correspond to apoptotic cells that nonspecifically bind the fluorescent nucleotide.
  • FIG. 20 shows an alternative method that relies on primer extension and the ligation of a short, labeled oligonucleotide. Left side, from top to bottom: SEQ ID NOS: 93-108; right side, from top to bottom: SEQ ID NOS: 109-124.
  • FIG. 21 depicts a system to enable a user to detect, analyze, and process images of samples.
  • DEFINITIONS
  • Unless defined otherwise herein, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. Although any methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the present invention, the preferred methods and materials are described.
  • All patents and publications, including all sequences disclosed within such patents and publications, referred to herein are expressly incorporated by reference.
  • Numeric ranges are inclusive of the numbers defining the range. Unless otherwise indicated, nucleic acids are written left to right in 5′ to 3′ orientation; amino acid sequences are written left to right in amino to carboxy orientation, respectively.
  • The headings provided herein are not limitations of the various aspects or embodiments of the invention. Accordingly, the terms defined immediately below are more fully defined by reference to the specification as a whole.
  • Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. Singleton, et al., DICTIONARY OF MICROBIOLOGY AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, 2D ED., John Wiley and Sons, New York (1994), and Hale & Markham, THE HARPER COLLINS DICTIONARY OF BIOLOGY, Harper Perennial, N.Y. (1991) provide one of skill with the general meaning of many of the terms used herein. Still, certain terms are defined below for the sake of clarity and ease of reference.
  • As used herein, the term “biological feature of interest” refers to any part of a cell that can be indicated by binding to a capture agent. Exemplary biological features of interest include cell walls, nuclei, cytoplasm, membrane, keratin, muscle fibers, collagen, bone, proteins, nucleic acid (e.g., mRNA or genomic DNA, etc). fat, etc. A biological feature of interest can also be indicated by immunohistological methods, e.g., a capture agent that is linked to an oligonucleotide. In these embodiments, the capture agent binds to an site, e.g., a protein epitope, in the sample. Exemplary epitopes include, but are not limited to carcinoembryonic antigen (for identification of adenocarcinomas, cytokeratins (for identification of carcinomas but may also be expressed in some sarcomas) CD15 and CD30 (for Hodgkin's disease), alpha fetoprotein (for yolk sac tumors and hepatocellular carcinoma), CD117 (for gastrointestinal stromal tumors), CD10 (for renal cell carcinoma and acute lymphoblastic leukemia), prostate specific antigen (for prostate cancer), estrogens and progesterone (for tumour identification), CD20 (for identification of B-cell lymphomas), CD3 (for identification of T-cell lymphomas). Complementary nucleic acid molecules (e.g., DNA and/or RNA) in the sample provide binding complementary sites for oligonucleotide probes.
  • As used herein, the term “multiplexing” refers to using more than one label for the simultaneous or sequential detection and measurement of biologically active material.
  • As used herein, the terms “antibody” and “immunoglobulin” are used interchangeably herein and are well understood by those in the field. Those terms refer to a protein consisting of one or more polypeptides that specifically binds an antigen. One form of antibody constitutes the basic structural unit of an antibody. This form is a tetramer and consists of two identical pairs of antibody chains, each pair having one light and one heavy chain. In each pair, the light and heavy chain variable regions are together responsible for binding to an antigen, and the constant regions are responsible for the antibody effector functions.
  • The recognized immunoglobulin polypeptides include the kappa and lambda light chains and the alpha, gamma (IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4), delta, epsilon and mu heavy chains or equivalents in other species. Full-length immunoglobulin “light chains” (of about 25 kDa or about 214 amino acids) comprise a variable region of about 110 amino acids at the NH2-terminus and a kappa or lambda constant region at the COOH-terminus. Full-length immunoglobulin “heavy chains” (of about 50 kDa or about 446 amino acids), similarly comprise a variable region (of about 116 amino acids) and one of the aforementioned heavy chain constant regions, e.g., gamma (of about 330 amino acids).
  • The terms “antibodies” and “immunoglobulin” include antibodies or immunoglobulins of any isotype, fragments of antibodies which retain specific binding to antigen, including, but not limited to, Fab, Fv, scFv, and Fd fragments, chimeric antibodies, humanized antibodies, minibodies, single-chain antibodies, and fusion proteins comprising an antigen-binding portion of an antibody and a non-antibody protein. Also encompassed by the term are Fab′, Fv, F(ab′)2, and or other antibody fragments that retain specific binding to antigen, and monoclonal antibodies. Antibodies may exist in a variety of other forms including, for example, Fv, Fab, and (Fab′)2, as well as bi-functional (i.e. bi-specific) hybrid antibodies (e.g., Lanzavecchia et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 17, 105 (1987)) and in single chains (e.g., Huston et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 85, 5879-5883 (1988) and Bird et al., Science, 242, 423-426 (1988), which are incorporated herein by reference). (See, generally, Hood et al., “Immunology”, Benjamin, N.Y., 2nd ed. (1984), and Hunkapiller and Hood, Nature, 323, 15-16 (1986),).
  • The term “specific binding” refers to the ability of a binding reagent to preferentially bind to a particular analyte that is present in a homogeneous mixture of different analytes. In certain embodiments, a specific binding interaction will discriminate between desirable and undesirable analytes in a sample, in some embodiments more than about 10 to 100-fold or more (e.g., more than about 1000- or 10,000-fold).
  • In certain embodiments, the affinity between a binding reagent and analyte when they are specifically bound in a capture agent/analyte complex is characterized by a KD (dissociation constant) of less than 10−6M, less than 10−7 M, less than 10−8 M, less than 10−9 M, less than 10−9 M, less than 10−11 M, or less than about 10−12 M or less.
  • A “plurality” contains at least 2 members. In certain cases, a plurality may have at least 2, at least 5, at least 10, at least 100, at least 1000, at least 10,000, at least 100,000, at least 106, at least 107, at least 108 or at least 109 or more members.
  • As used herein, the term “labeling” refers to attaching a detectable fluorophore to specific sites in a sample (e.g., sites containing an epitope for the antibody being used, for example) such that the presence and/or abundance of the sites can be determined by evaluating the presence and/or abundance of the label.
  • The term “labelling” refers to a method for producing a labeled sample in which any necessary steps are performed in any convenient order, as long as the required labeled sample is produced. For example, in some embodiments and as will be exemplified below, the capture agent may be already linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid prior to binding of the antibody to the sample, in which case a sample can be labeled using relatively few steps. In other embodiments, the capture agent may be linked to the first strand of the double stranded nucleic acid at the time at which it is incubated with the sample. In these embodiments, the second strand of the double stranded nucleic acid may be hybridized to the first strand of the double stranded nucleic acid after the antibody has bound to the sample. Along similar lines, the capture agent may be linked to a rolling circle amplification (RCA) primer at the time at which it is incubated with the sample. In these embodiments, the double-stranded nucleic acid may be produced by: a) hybridizing the sample with a padlock probe having ends that are complementary to the RCA primer, ligating the ends of the padlock probes together, and copying the padlock probe by rolling circle amplification and b) hybridizing an oligonucleotide to the RCA product, as illustrated in FIG. 16. In this example, the RCA product is the first strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid, and the oligonucleotides that are hybridized to the RCA product are the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid. In many embodiments, the labeling step may comprise crosslinking the capture agent to the planar sample so that subsequence manipulations can be done without the capture agent disassociating from its complementary sites in the planar sample. In these embodiments, if the capture agent is linked to the double-stranded nucleic acid prior to binding of the antibody to the sample, then the crosslinking step may be done immediately after binding of the antibody to the sample. In embodiments in which the capture agent is only linked to the first strand (or an RCA primer for making the same) at the time at which it is incubated with the sample, the sample may be cross-linked after binding of the antibody to is the sample, and the double-stranded may be produced after crosslinking.
  • As used herein, the term “planar sample” refers to a substantially planar, i.e., two dimensional, material (e.g. glass, metal, ceramics, organic polymer surface or gel) that contains cells or any combinations of biomolecules derived from cells, such as proteins, nucleic acids, lipids, oligo/polysachharides, biomolecule complexes, cellular organels, cellular debris or excretions (exosomes, microvesicles). A planar cellular sample can be made by, e.g., growing cells on a planar surface, depositing cells on a planar surface, e.g., by centrifugation, by cutting a three dimensional object that contains cells into sections and mounting the sections onto a planar surface, i.e., producing a tissue section, absorbing the cellular components onto the surface that is functionalized with affinity agents (e.g. antibodies, haptens, nucleic acid probes), introducing the biomolecules into a polymer gel or transferring them onto a polymer surface electrophoretically or by other means. The cells or biomolecules may be fixed using any number of reagents including formalin, methanol, paraformaldehyde, methanol:acetic acid, glutaraldehyde, bifunctional crosslinkers such as bis(succinimidyl)suberate, bis(succinimidyl)polyethyleneglycole etc. This definition is intended to cover cellular samples (e.g., tissue sections, etc), electrophoresis gels and blots thereof, Western blots, dot-blots, ELISAs, antibody microarrays, nucleic acid microarrays etc.
  • As used herein, the term “tissue section” refers to a piece of tissue that has been obtained from a subject, fixed, sectioned, and mounted on a planar surface, e.g., a microscope slide.
  • As used herein, the term “formalin-fixed paraffin embedded (FFPE) tissue section” refers to a piece of tissue, e.g., a biopsy that has been obtained from a subject, fixed in formaldehyde (e.g., 3%-5% formaldehyde in phosphate buffered saline) or Bouin solution, embedded in wax, cut into thin sections, and then mounted on a microscope slide.
  • As used herein, the term “spatially-addressable measurements” refers to a set of values that are each associated with a specific position on a surface. Spatially-addressable measurements can be mapped to a position in a sample and can be used to reconstruct an image of the sample.
  • A “diagnostic marker” is a specific biochemical in the body which has a particular molecular feature that makes it useful for detecting a disease, measuring the progress of disease or the effects of treatment, or for measuring a process of interest.
  • A “pathoindicative” cell is a cell which, when present in a tissue, indicates that the animal in which the tissue is located (or from which the tissue was obtained) is afflicted with a disease or disorder. By way of example, the presence of one or more breast cells in a lung tissue of an animal is an indication that the animal is afflicted with metastatic breast cancer.
  • The term “complementary site” is used to refer to an epitope for an antibody or aptamer, or a nucleic acid molecule if the capture agent is an oligonucleotide probe.
  • Specifically, if the capture agent is an antibody, then the complementary site for the capture agent is the epitope in the sample to which the antibody binds. If the capture agent is an oligonucleotide probe, then the complementary site for the capture agent is a complementary sequence in a DNA or RNA molecule in the sample.
  • The term “epitope” as used herein is defined as small chemical groups on the antigen molecule that is bound to by an antibody. An antigen can have one or more epitopes. In many cases, an epitope is roughly five amino acids or sugars in size. One skilled in the art understands that generally the overall three-dimensional structure or the specific linear sequence of the molecule can be the main criterion of antigenic specificity.
  • A “subject” of diagnosis or treatment is a plant or animal, including a human. Non-human animals subject to diagnosis or treatment include, for example, livestock and pets.
  • As used herein, the term “incubating” refers to maintaining a planar sample and capture agent under conditions (which conditions include a period of time, a temperature, an appropriate binding buffer and a wash) that are suitable for specific binding of the capture agent to molecules (e.g., epitopes or complementary nucleic acid) in the planar sample.
  • As used herein, the term “capture agent” refers to an agent that can specifically bind to complementary sites in a planar sample. Exemplary capture agents include, e.g., an antibody, an aptamer, and a nucleic acid (e.g., oligonucleotide) probe (which may be DNA or RNA) that hybridizes to a binding site. If antibodies are used, in many cases the antibodies may bind to protein epitopes. If nucleic acid probes are used, the nucleic acid probes may bind to, for example, genomic DNA or RNA (such that the location and abundance of intracellular RNAs can be detected).
  • As used herein, the term “extendible”, in the context of, for example, a 3′ end that is “extendible using the other strand as a template”, means that a polymerase or ligase can add to the 3′ end of a nucleic acid molecule, where the template sequence that is immediately downstream of the 3′ end (i.e., on the other strand) determines which nucleotides (if a polymerase is used) or oligonucleotide (if a ligase is used) is added. A “5′ end that is extendible using the other strand as a template” means that a ligase can add an oligonucleotide to the 5′ end of a nucleic acid molecule, where the template sequence that is immediately downstream of the 5′ end (i.e., on the other strand) determines which oligonucleotide is added.
  • As used herein, the term “template sequence that is immediately downstream to the 3′ end” refers to the sequence on the other strand that use used as a template for extending the 3′ end, starting with the first nucleotide. In embodiments in which the first strand is an RCA product, the template sequence that is immediately downstream of the 3′ end may be a sequence in the RCA product. In embodiments in which the first strand is an oligonucleotide, the template sequence that is immediately downstream of the 3′ end may be a 5′ overhang. As used herein, the term “capture agent that is linked to a double stranded nucleic acid” refers to a capture agent, e.g., an antibody or an oligonucleotide probe, that is non-covalently (e.g., via a streptavidin/biotin interaction) or covalently (e.g., via a click reaction or the like) linked to an double-stranded nucleic acid (which may be composed of two single-stranded oligonucleotide strands that are hybridized together, or an RCA product that is hybridized to a plurality of oligonucleotides) in a way that the capture agent can still bind to its binding site and the 3′ end of one of the nucleic acids is accessible to a polymerase and/or ligase. The nucleic acid and the capture agent may be linked via a number of different methods, including those that use maleimide or halogen-containing group, which are cysteine-reactive. The capture agent and the nucleic acid may be linked at, proximal to or at the 5′ end of one of the strands of the double stranded nucleic acid, proximal to or at the 3′ end of one of the strands of the double stranded nucleic acid, or anywhere in-between.
  • The terms “nucleic acid” and “polynucleotide” are used interchangeably herein to describe a polymer of any length, e.g., greater than about 2 bases, greater than about 10 bases, greater than about 100 bases, greater than about 500 bases, greater than 1000 bases, up to about 10,000 or more bases composed of nucleotides, e.g., deoxyribonucleotides, ribonucleotides or a combination thereof, and may be produced enzymatically or synthetically (e.g., PNA as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,948,902 and the references cited therein) and which can hybridize with naturally occurring nucleic acids in a sequence specific manner analogous to that of two naturally occurring nucleic acids, e.g., can participate in Watson-Crick base pairing interactions. Naturally-occurring nucleotides include guanine, cytosine, adenine, thymine, uracil (G, C, A, T and U respectively). DNA and RNA have a deoxyribose and ribose sugar backbone, respectively, whereas PNA's backbone is composed of repeating N-(2-aminoethyl)-glycine units linked by peptide bonds. In PNA various purine and pyrimidine bases are linked to the backbone by methylene carbonyl bonds. A locked nucleic acid (LNA), often referred to as an inaccessible RNA, is a modified RNA nucleotide. The ribose moiety of an LNA nucleotide is modified with an extra bridge connecting the 2′ oxygen and 4′ carbon. The bridge “locks” the ribose in the 3′-endo (North) conformation, which is often found in the A-form duplexes. LNA nucleotides can be mixed with DNA or RNA residues in the oligonucleotide whenever desired. The term “unstructured nucleic acid”, or “UNA”, is a nucleic acid containing non-natural nucleotides that bind to each other with reduced stability. For example, an unstructured nucleic acid may contain a G′ residue and a C′ residue, where these residues correspond to non-naturally occurring forms, i.e., analogs, of G and C that base pair with each other with reduced stability, but retain an ability to base pair with naturally occurring C and G residues, respectively. Unstructured nucleic acid is described in US20050233340, which is incorporated by reference herein for disclosure of UNA.
  • As used herein, the term “oligonucleotide” refers to a multimer of at least 10, e.g., at least 15 or at least 30 nucleotides. In some embodiments, an oligonucleotide may be in the range of 15-200 nucleotides in length, or more.
  • As used herein, the term “reading” in the context of reading a fluorescent signal, refers to obtaining an image by scanning or by microscopy, where the image shows the pattern of fluorescence as well as the intensity of fluorescence in a field of view.
  • As used herein, the term “primer” is an oligonucleotide, either natural or synthetic, that is capable, upon forming a duplex with a polynucleotide template, of acting as a point of initiation of nucleic acid synthesis and being extended from its 3′ end along the template so that an extended duplex is formed. The sequence of nucleotides added during the extension process is determined by the sequence of the template polynucleotide. Usually primers are extended by a DNA polymerase. A primer may be at least 10, e.g., at least 15 or at least 30 nucleotides in length.
  • As used herein, the term “single nucleotide 5′ overhang” refers to a 5′ overhang, where the overhang is a single nucleotide in length. Likewise, a “two nucleotide 5′ overhang” is a 5′ overhang, where the overhang is two nucleotides in length. The 3′ end is recessed in a 5′ overhang.
  • In certain cases, the various nucleotides of an overhang may be referred to by their position, e.g., “first position” and “second position”. In these cases, the “position” is relative to the recessed 3′ end. As such, in a multiple base 5′ overhang, the “first” position of the overhang is immediately adjacent to the recessed 3′ end and the “second” position of the overhang is immediately adjacent to the first position.
  • In certain cases, the complementary strands of a double stranded oligonucleotide or nucleic acid may be referred to herein as being the “first” and “second” or the “top” and “bottom” strands. The assignment of a strand as being a “top” or “bottom” strand is arbitrary and does not imply any particular orientation, function or structure.
  • As used herein, the term “signal generated by”, in the context of reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotide, refers to a signal that is emitted directly from the fluorescent nucleotide, a signal that is emitted indirectly via energy transfer to another fluorescent nucleotide (i.e., by FRET).
  • As used herein, the term “fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide comprising a quencher” refers to an oligonucleotide that contains a fluorophore and a quencher, wherein the quencher quenches the fluorophore in the same oligonucleotide.
  • As used herein, the term “different” in the context of different 5′ overhangs that are different, refers to overhangs that have a different sequence. Overhangs of different lengths (e.g., GATC vs GAT) implicitly have a different sequence, even through one sequence may be encompassed by the other.
  • As used herein, the term “overhang” refers to a structure in which one strand of a double stranded nucleic acid ends such that nucleic acid synthesis can be initiated from that strand by a polymerase (or an oligonucleotide can be ligated to the end by a ligase) using the other strand as a template.
  • As used herein, the term “adding to the extendible 3′ end”, in the context of adding one or more nucleotides or an oligonucleotide to an extendible 3′ end, refers to adding nucleotides (or an oligonucleotide) to an extendible 3′ end using the other strand as a template (e.g., adding to the recessed 3′ end of a 5′ overhang using the overhang as a template).
  • As used herein, the term “template of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3-5′ followed by an optional short stretch (e.g., 1-5 residues) of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, where N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 0, 1 or more”, refers to a population of sequences that potentially contains single nucleotide overhangs of nucleotides N1, N2 and N3 or the population of overhangs comprises two nucleotide overhangs of sequence 3′-N4N1-5′, 3′-N4N2-5′ and 3′-N4N3-5′-5′ and, optionally overhangs of sequence, 3′-N4N4N1-5′, 3′-N4N4N2-5′ and 3′-N4N4N3-5′ and so on (e.g., four nucleotide overhangs of sequence 3′-N4N4N4N1-5′, 3′-N4N4N4N2-5′ and 3′-N4N4N4N3-5′).
  • As used herein, the term “template of the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by short stretch (e.g., 1-5 residues) of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of bases N3 and N4, wherein nucleotide N3 is in odd positions and nucleotide N4 is in even positions, counting from the start of the overhang and N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C” refers to a population of sequences that potentially contain sequences 3′-N1-5′ and 3′-N2-5′ or optionally 3′-N3N1-5′ and 3′-N3N2-5′ or 3′-N3N4N1-5′ and 3′-N3N4N2-5′ and, optionally, overhangs of sequence 3′-N3N4N3N1-5′ and 3′-N3N4N3N2-5′ and so on (e.g., overhangs of sequence 3′-N3N4N3N4N1-5′ and 3′-N3N4N3N4N2-5′ and then 3′-N3N4N3N4N3N1-5′ and 3′-N3N4N3N4N3N2-5′).
  • As used herein, the term “alternating stretches” refers to two nucleotides stretches, where one “stretch” is a contiguous sequence of, e.g., up to 10, of the same nucleotide (e.g., a G, A, T or C), and the second stretch is contiguous sequence of, e.g., up to 10, of a different nucleotide, that alternate with one another, i.e., one stretch (e.g., a string of T's) occupies the odd positions and the other stretch (e.g., a string of A's) occupies the even positions.
  • As used herein, the term “incomplete nucleotide mix” comprises a nucleotide mix that contains one, two or three nucleotides (but not all four nucleotides) selected from G, A, T and C. The nucleotides may be labeled or unlabeled.
  • As used herein, the term “reversible terminator” refers to a chemically modified nucleotide base that when incorporated into growing DNA strand by DNA polymerase blocks further incorporation of bases. Such “reversible terminator” base and DNA strand can be deprotected by chemical treatment and following such deprotection DNA strand can be further extended by DNA polymerase.
  • As used herein, the term “fluorescently labeled reversible terminator” refers to a “reversible terminator” base which is labeled by fluorophore through linker cleavable by same treatment which is used to deprotect the DNA strand which ends with this base. Deprotecting the “fluorescently labeled reversible terminator” simultaneously activates the DNA strand for further extension and removes the fluorescent label from it.
  • For ease of description, many of the sequences described herein are written out in the 3′ to 5′ direction. While DNA sequences are routinely set forth in 5′ to 3′ direction, for the ease description, certain DNA sequences in the text below are described in the 3′ to 5′ direction. In each such case the directionality is specifically annotated.
  • Other definitions of terms may appear throughout the specification.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • In some embodiments the method comprises producing a labeled a planar sample (e.g., an FFPE section mounted on a planar surface such as a microscope slide) using a capture agent that specifically binds to complementary sites in the planar sample. Methods for binding antibodies and/or nucleic acids to sites in the planar sample are well known. In these embodiments, the capture agent in the labeled sample is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand (e.g., two oligonucleotide that are hybridized together or an RCA product that is hybridized to oligonucleotides) and the capture agent is linked (covalently or non-covalently via a biotin) to the double-stranded nucleic acid by the first strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid (e.g., by the 5′ end, the 3′ end, or anywhere in-between), and the 3′ end or 5′ end of one of the strands (e.g., the 3′ end of the first strand, any 3′ ends in the second strand, the 5′ end of the first strand or any 5′ ends in the second strand) is extendible using the other strand as a template. In some cases, the 3′ end of the first strand may be recessed relative to the 5′ end of the second strand, thereby defining an overhang. In other cases, the 5′ end of the first strand may be recessed relative to the 3′ end of the second strand, thereby defining an overhang. In many embodiments, the capture agent is cross-linked the planar sample, thereby preventing the capture agent from disassociating during subsequent steps. This crosslinking step may be done using any amine-to-amine crosslinker (e.g. formaldehyde, disuccinimiyllutarate or another reagents of similar action) although a variety of other chemistries can be used to cross-link the capture agent to the planar sample if desired. The method comprises reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of a nucleotide or short oligonucleotide (e.g., of 2-10 bases) to the extendible end (e.g., the 3′ end) of one of the strands. This step may be done by contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix, a ligase and a labeled oligonucleotide, or a combination of the two, thereby adding one or more nucleotides and/or a labeled oligonucleotide to the extendible end; and reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the one or more nucleotides or oligonucleotide to the extendible end.
  • As will be described in greater detail below, the fluorescent signal may be generated by a variety of different methods. For example, in some embodiments, the fluorescent signal may be fluorescence from a fluorescent nucleotide added to the end of the primer, or a FRET (fluorescence resonance energy transfer) signal resulting from the same. In other embodiments, the signal may generated by removing a quencher from a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide that is also hybridized to the oligonucleotide.
  • In any implementation of the method, the reading step may be followed by inactivating the fluorescence after reading so that other binding events can be detected and read. In these embodiments, the fluorescence may be inactivated by peroxide-based bleaching, cleavage of fluorophore linked to nucleotide through cleavable linker (e.g. using TCEP as a cleaving reagent), base-exchange by exo+ polymerase such as Vent, or subsequent incorporation of quencher, for example.
  • Also, as will be described in greater detailed below, the method may be multiplexed in a way that a single planar sample can be interrogated by a plurality of different capture agents, where each antibody is linked to a different oligonucleotide (i.e., oligonucleotides of different sequence). In multiplex embodiments, the planar sample may be labeled using at least 5, at least 10, at least 20, at least 30, at least 50, or at least 100, up to 150 or more capture agents that are each linked to a different oligonucleotide, and binding of the capture agents can be separately read using a fluorescence microscope equipped with an appropriate filter for each fluorophore, or by using dual or triple band-pass filter sets to observe multiple fluorophores. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,776,688. As noted below, the oligonucleotides linked to the capture agent may act as a splint for a padlock probe, and as a primer for initiating rolling circle amplification.
  • The capture agent used in some embodiments of the method may be linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide that contains a 5′ overhang (i.e., a recessed 3′ end that can be extended by a polymerase or ligase) or a 3′ overhang (i.e., a recessed 5′ end that can be extended by a ligase). An example of such a capture agent is shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. In the example shown in FIG. 1B, the overhang is a single nucleotide overhang (e.g., an A), although a longer overhang (e.g., at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, at least 6, at least 8, at least 10, at least 20, or at least at least 30, may be useful for other applications (e.g., multiplexed applications). As shown in FIG. 5 A-D, in certain cases, the overhang may contain a repeated sequence, e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 or more repeats of the same sequence of 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 nucleotides, thereby allowing the capture agent to be used in multiplexed applications as described below. In certain embodiments, the double stranded oligonucleotide may have a recessed 3′ end at the other end of the oligonucleotide (i.e., at the end closest to the capture agent). However, this end may be designed to be not extendible. In certain circumstances, the double-stranded oligonucleotide may contain one or more third oligonucleotides that are hybridized to the overhang. In these embodiments, there will be a gap of 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 or more nucleotides between the second strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide and the oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the overhang (see, e.g., FIGS. 7 and 8). In multiplex embodiments, the plurality of capture agents may be distinguished by the sequence of the overhang and not by the sequence of the first strand of the double stranded oligonucleotide. In these embodiments, the second strand of the double stranded oligonucleotides is different for each of the capture agents. As shown in other figures, the method may also be implemented using capture agents that are linked to a primer that acts a splint for circularlizing a padlock probe and for priming amplification of circularlized padlock probe by rolling circle amplification. In these embodiments, the capture agents in the labeled sample may be linked to a rolling circle amplification product.
  • In certain cases, the fluorophore used may be a coumarin, a cyanine, a benzofuran, a quinoline, a quinazolinone, an indole, a benzazole, a borapolyazaindacene and or a xanthene including fluorescein, rhodamine and rhodol. In multiplexing embodiments, fluorophores may be chosen so that they are distinguishable, i.e., independently detectable, from one another, meaning that the labels can be independently detected and measured, even when the labels are mixed. In other words, the amounts of label present (e.g., the amount of fluorescence) for each of the labels are separately determinable, even when the labels are co-located (e.g., in the same tube or in the same area of the section).
  • Specific fluorescent dyes of interest include: xanthene dyes, e.g., fluorescein and rhodamine dyes, such as fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC), 6-carboxyfluorescein (commonly known by the abbreviations FAM and F), 6-carboxy-2′,4′,7′,4,7-hexachlorofluorescein (HEX), 6-carboxy-4′, 5′-dichloro-2′, 7′-dimethoxyfluorescein (JOE or J), N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyl-6-carboxyrhodamine (TAMRA or T), 6-carboxy-X-rhodamine (ROX or R), 5-carboxyrhodamine-6G (R6G5 or G5), 6-carboxyrhodamine-6G (R6G6 or G6), and rhodamine 110; cyanine dyes, e.g., Cy3, Cy5 and Cy7 dyes; coumarins, e.g., umbelliferone; benzimide dyes, e.g. Hoechst 33258; phenanthridine dyes, e.g., Texas Red; ethidium dyes; acridine dyes; carbazole dyes; phenoxazine dyes; porphyrin dyes; polymethine dyes, e.g., BODIPY dyes and quinoline dyes. Specific fluorophores of interest that are commonly used in subject applications include: Pyrene, Coumarin, Diethylaminocoumarin, FAM, Fluorescein Chlorotriazinyl, Fluorescein, R110, Eosin, JOE, R6G, Tetramethylrhodamine, TAMRA, Lissamine, Napthofluorescein, Texas Red, Cy3, and Cy5, etc.
  • Suitable distinguishable fluorescent label pairs useful in the subject methods include Cy-3 and Cy-5 (Amersham Inc., Piscataway, N.J.), Quasar 570 and Quasar 670 (Biosearch Technology, Novato Calif.), Alexafluor555 and Alexafluor647 (Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.), BODIPY V-1002 and BODIPY V1005 (Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.), POPO-3 and TOTO-3 (Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.), and POPRO3 and TOPRO3 (Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.). Further suitable distinguishable detectable labels may be found in Kricka et al. (Ann Clin Biochem. 39:114-29, 2002), Ried et al. (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 1992: 89: 1388-1392) and Tanke et al. (Eur. J. Hum. Genet. 1999 7:2-11) and others.
  • In addition to the labeling methods described above, the sample may be stained using a cytological stain, either before or after performing the method described above. In these embodiments, the stain may be, for example, phalloidin, gadodiamide, acridine orange, bismarck brown, barmine, Coomassie blue, bresyl violet, brystal violet, DAPI, hematoxylin, eosin, ethidium bromide, acid fuchsine, haematoxylin, hoechst stains, iodine, malachite green, methyl green, methylene blue, neutral red, Nile blue, Nile red, osmium tetroxide (formal name: osmium tetraoxide), rhodamine, safranin, phosphotungstic acid, osmium tetroxide, ruthenium tetroxide, ammonium molybdate, cadmium iodide, carbohydrazide, ferric chloride, hexamine, indium trichloride, lanthanum nitrate, lead acetate, lead citrate, lead(II) nitrate, periodic acid, phosphomolybdic acid, potassium ferricyanide, potassium ferrocyanide, ruthenium red, silver nitrate, silver proteinate, sodium chloroaurate, thallium nitrate, thiosemicarbazide, uranyl acetate, uranyl nitrate, vanadyl sulfate, or any derivative thereof. The stain may be specific for any feature of interest, such as a protein or class of proteins, phospholipids, DNA (e.g., dsDNA, ssDNA), RNA, an organelle (e.g., cell membrane, mitochondria, endoplasmic recticulum, golgi body, nulear envelope, and so forth), a compartment of the cell (e.g., cytosol, nuclear fraction, and so forth). The stain may enhance contrast or imaging of intracellular or extracellular structures. In some embodiments, the sample may be stained with haematoxylin and eosin (H&E).
  • The structures of exemplary sulfhydryl-cleavable deoxynucleotide analogues that can be used in the present method are shown below. As would be recognized, these nucleotides are only exemplary and other nucleotides, including nucleotides that are cleavable by other stimuli (e.g., photocleavable nucleotides) can be used in the present method.
  • Figure US20170107563A1-20170420-C00001
  • In order to further illustrate the present invention, the following specific examples are given with the understanding that they are being offered to illustrate the present invention and should not be construed in any way as limiting its scope.
  • Implementation I
  • In this example, the fluorescent signal may be produced by a fluorescent nucleotide that is added to (i.e., added by a polymerase or, if the fluorescent nucleotide is in an oligonucleotide, ligated onto) the 3′ end of the primer. This method may comprise reading a signal from the added fluorescent nucleotide, or reading a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two fluorescent nucleotides that are added to the primer.
  • The example shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 shows how an antibody can be linked to a oligonucleotide chemically, or via biotin/streptavidin interactions (FIG. 1B) and how a fluorescent signal can be generated by adding a fluorescent nucleotide to the end of the primer (FIG. 2). In this example, the antigen is stained by an antibody that is coupled to a DNA dimer with an overhanging 5′ end (lower strand) and recessed 3′ end (upper strand) either chemically (FIG. 1 top panel) or through streptavidin (FIG. 1 bottom and middle panels).
  • After binding the capture agent to the tissue sample, the pattern of binding of the capture agent may be determined using an on-slide end fill-in reaction by using a suitable polymerase (e.g., by exo Klenow, Bst, Taq, Klentaq, or an exo Klenow-Vent mixture) and fluorescently labeled nucleotide (FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 top panel).
  • If necessary, the signal-to-noise ratio can be increased by: a) multimerization of position complementary to labeling nucleotide (FIG. 2, middle panel); or b) by generating a FRET between two nucleotides are incorporated, whereby the emission wavelength of one of the nucleotides (FIG. 2, bottom panel C on the figure) serves as an excitation wavelength for another (FIG. 2, bottom panel U on the figure).
  • Fluorescence may be inactivated before addition of subsequent staining reagents by any convenient method including, but not limited to photobleaching, peroxide-based bleaching, inactivation by ozone, cleavage of fluorophore linked to nucleotide through cleavable linker (e.g. using TCEP as a cleaving reagent), base-exchange by exo+ polymerase such as Vent, subsequent incorporation of quencher.
  • In these embodiments, after fluorescence has been inactivated, the method can be repeated, i.e., the planar sample may be re-stained using a different antibody and fluorescence can be read.
  • Multiplexing
  • Multiplexing can be implemented using specially designed oligonucleotides using two different approaches, referred to as the “reversible terminator” and “missing base” approaches, which are described in greater detail below. Both of these methods rely on a composition comprising a plurality of (e.g., at least 5, at least 10, at least 20, at least 30, at least 50, or at least 100, up to 150 or more) capture agents that recognize different complementary sites, wherein: each of the capture agents is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid (e.g., oligonucleotide) that comprises a first strand and a second strand; the capture agents are linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid by the (e.g., the 5′ end of) the first strand; the 3′ end of one of the strands in each of the double-stranded nucleic acids extendible using the other strand as a template, where the template is different for each of the capture agents. Examples of such compositions are illustrated in FIGS. 3 and 4, where the template is an overhang. The general principle shown in FIGS. 3 and 4 can be extended to double stranded nucleic acids that comprise RCA products. FIG. 3 shows a population of capture agents that have a template (e.g., overhang) defined by the formula: 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3-5′ followed by short stretch of random composition on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, where N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 0, 1 or more. FIG. 4, on the other hand, shows a population of capture agents that have an overhang defined by the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by short stretch (e.g., 1-5 residues) of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of bases N3 and N4, wherein nucleotide N3 is in odd positions and nucleotide N4 is in even positions, counting from the start of the overhang and N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C. As illustrated in FIGS. 3, 4 and 5, the sequence of the first strand is the same for each of the capture agents; and the sequence of the second strand is different for each of the capture agents. In these embodiments, the different second strands make the overhangs different between the different capture agents.
  • In some embodiments, the multiplex methods may generally comprise: (a) incubating a planar sample with an above-described antibody composition under conditions by which the capture agents bind to complementary sites in the planar sample; (b) cross-linking the capture agents to the planar sample; (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and either an incomplete nucleotide mix of labeled and unlabeled nucleotides or a nucleotide mix where some or all nucleotides are fluorescent and some or all nucleotides are reversible terminator nucleotides or fluorescent reversible terminator nucleotides and optionally, contacting the planar sample with a mixture of labelled and unlabeled oligonucleotides and a DNA ligase enzyme that covalently attaches the short labelled oligonucleotides to the 3′ end of the oligonucleotide duplexes that are attached to the specific capture agents. In these embodiments, oligonucleotides are only added to duplexes that an overhang that is complementary to the oligonucleotide. This method further comprises (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition a nucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents. Following signal registration, this method may comprise (e) removing the fluorescent signals by chemical or photocleavage of a labeled nucleotide if the reversible terminator approach is used, followed by deprotecting the 3′ ends of the oligonucleotides, enabling the addition of further nucleotides and/or oligonucleotides. Step (c) of this method may comprise (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and: (i) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4 or (ii) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent reversible terminator nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4 or (iii) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, and N2, an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N3, and no nucleotide that is complementary to N4, thereby adding fluorescent nucleotides onto the double-stranded oligonucleotides of some but not all of the capture agents thereby adding fluorescent nucleotides onto the double-stranded oligonucleotides of some but not all of the capture agents; and (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition of a fluorescent nucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents. Step (c) can also be implemented by adding a labeled oligonucleotide to the duplex using a ligase. Examples of such methods are described in greater detail below.
  • With reference to FIG. 6 it is expected that in the case when larger panels of capture agents are to be employed (e.g. 100 and more) the length of the read over the oligonucleotide overhangs may increase accordingly. This may or may not reduce the efficiency of staining due to accumulation of primer extension errors along the length of the oligonucleotide duplex. To circumvent such potential source of signal loss a slight modification of design can be implemented. The plurality of capture agents can be divided in sets such that number of capture agents in the set does exceed the capacity of the multiplexing protocol to render staining without significant signal loss (e.g. 30). Each such set of capture agents will be conjugated to “terminated” (the last 3′ base is dideoxy- or propyl-modified) upper strand oligonucleotide of the same sequence as in the original version of the “missing base” approach. The lower strand oligonucleotides will incorporate an additional set-specific region which will serve as a landing spot for an additional primer which is to be on-slide hybridized to the particular subset of the total plurality of the antibodies at the time when they are to be rendered. This approach allows not to extend the reads beyond certain threshold and at the same time have an unlimited potential number of capture agents in the sample.
  • Reversible Terminator Method
  • This implementation of the method relies on reversible terminators, i.e., chain terminator nucleotides that can be de-protected after incorporation, thereby allowing further nucleotides to be added to that nucleotide.
  • This method can be implemented using a composition comprising a plurality of capture agents that are linked to a double stranded nucleic acid (e.g., oligonucleotides), as illustrated in FIG. 3. In these embodiments, the top strand of the double stranded nucleic acid is linked to the capture agent and may be the same for each antibody, and the sequence of the bottom strand varies between capture agents. As shown on FIG. 5A, the 5′ end of the lower strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid (which may form an overhang) is of the general 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3-5′ followed by short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, where N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 0, 1 or more. As shown on FIG. 5B a more general formula of lower oligonucleotide overhang 3′-XN1/N2/N3-5′, where N1, N2, N3 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and X is a nucleotide stretch of bases Xi (such that Xi are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C) of random composition and length is also applicable in this method.
  • In certain embodiments, this method may comprise: (a) incubating a planar sample with a multiplex antibody composition in which the overhangs are of the formula 5′-N1/N2/N3N4n, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more; under conditions by which the capture agents specifically bind to complementary sites in the planar sample; (b) cross-linking the capture agent to the planar sample; (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4 and/or ligating a oligonucleotide that comprises a labeled nucleotide; and (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition of a nucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents. This cycle may be repeated by (e) inactivating the fluorescent signal, deprotecting the reversible terminator nucleotide and (f) blocking the planar sample; and repeating steps (c) and (d). In certain embodiments, the method may comprise repeating steps (c), (d) (e) and (f) multiple times. The reagent used for blocking may vary depending on the chemistry used. In certain embodiments, the sample may be blocked with a thiol-reactive compounds such as cysteine, glutathione or iodoacetamide.
  • For example, this method can be implemented using a composition comprising: a first antibody linked to a first double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the first double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a single nucleotide 5′ overhang comprising base N1; a second antibody linked to a second double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the second double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a single nucleotide 5′ overhang comprising base N2; a third antibody linked to a third double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the third double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a single nucleotide 5′ overhang comprising base N3; a fourth antibody linked to a fourth double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a two nucleotide 5′ overhang, wherein the first position of the overhang comprises base N4 and the second position of the overhang is base N1; a fifth antibody linked to a fifth double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the fifth double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a two nucleotide 5′ overhang, wherein the first position of the overhang comprises base N4 and the second position of the overhang is base N2; and a sixth antibody linked to a sixth double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the sixth double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a two nucleotide 5′ overhang, wherein the first position of the overhang comprises base N4 and the second position of the overhang is base N3, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C. An example of such a population of capture agents is shown in FIG. 3.
  • In RCA embodiments, the strand linked to the antibodies may be different for each of the antibodies, where the RCA product contains a sequence conforming to the formula described above in each repeat of the RCA product.
  • In certain implementations, the composition may also contain a seventh antibody linked to a seventh double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the seventh double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a multiple nucleotide 5′ overhang, wherein the first position of the overhang comprises base N4, the second position of the overhang is base N4 and third is selected from N1, N2, and N3. The same principle may be applied to overhangs that have more than 7 positions (e.g., 9, 10, 11 up to 20, 30, or 40 ore more) positions.
  • In this implementation of the method, the planar sample can be co-stained simultaneously using a panel of capture agents, each labeled with one oligonucleotide duplex designed according to the strategy outlined on FIG. 3. The duplexes are designed in such a way that each antibody has the same upper strand sequence linked, covalently or through streptavidin, to an antibody through the 5′ end. The lower strand changes from antibody to antibody. In this implementation, the general formula for the lower strand is 3′-dideoxydC-sequence-complimentary-to-upper-strand GnA/T/C-5′. One type of lower strand base (nucleotide G in this example) is reserved for step-wise progression and its complementary pair on the upper strand is never used in labeled form. The other three bases are complementary to labeled nucleotides and can be used to identify three capture agents per cycle. In a more general case the general formula for the lower strand is 3′-dideoxydC-sequence-complimentary-to-upper-strand-X-N1/N2/N3-5′ where X, of X is any nucleotide excluding one reserved for “walking base” of this particular cycle and X is any base as shown on FIG. 5B. This design ensures that: a) no two antibody species contain the same duplex and b) only three different capture agents are detected at a time. Each cycle includes: (a) a labeling step in which the three capture agents are labeled and duplexes on the rest are extended one base at a time, (b) an imaging step and (c) a destaining/deprotection step. During cycle to cycle transition the added fluorescent labels from the previous cycle are inactivated by any of the suitable methods, including but not limited to: cleavage of fluorophore off the nucleotide (if the labeled nucleotide is linked to the fluorophore through a cleavable linker); peroxide based bleaching; photobleaching; chemically-assisted photobleaching; labeled base replacement by exo+ polymerase, etc. After or simultaneously with inactivation of the fluorophores added in the previous reaction, the unlabeled “extension” nucleotide that has been added to the remainder of the capture agents is activated by cleavage of the protective group off its 3′ end. Cleavage of the protective group, in turn, allows that nucleotide to be extended in the next cycle. Since the A, T and C are reserved for incorporation of a labelled nucleotide, those nucleotides only occur at the end of each lower strand of the duplex. This approach is based on the chemical nature of reversible terminators, which precludes upper strand extension for more than one nucleotide at a time even on polyG stretches of the lower strand. Optionally, a quencher labeled nucleotide can be incorporated following the labeled nucleotide. The performance of “reversible terminator method” as exemplified in sequential detection of CD4 and CD8 positive T-cells in smears of mouse splenocytes is illustrated in FIG. 13A-D.
  • Missing Base Method
  • This implementation of the method relies on a “missing” base design in which, in each cycle, two labeled and one unlabeled nucleotides are added to the reaction, and the “missing base” prevents the primers from being extended by more than a single nucleotide.
  • This method can be implemented using a composition comprising a plurality of capture agents that are linked to double stranded nucleic acids, as illustrated in FIG. 4. In these embodiments, the top strand of the double stranded nucleic acids is linked to the capture agent and may be the same for each antibody, and the sequence of the bottom strand varies between capture agents. As shown in FIG. 4, the 5′ end of the lower strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide (which forms the overhang) is of the general formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by short stretch (e.g., 1-5 residues) of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of bases N3 and N4, wherein nucleotide N3 is in odd positions and nucleotide N4 is in even positions, counting from the start of the overhang and N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • Also a more general formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of alternating random length stretches of bases N3 and N4 such that the order number of N3— stretches is odd and of N4 stretches is even, may be applicable in this method
  • In certain embodiments, this method may comprise: (a) incubating a planar sample with a multiplex antibody composition in which the overhangs are of the formula (3′-YN1/N2-5′) described in the prior paragraph; under conditions by which the capture agents specifically bind complementary sites in the planar sample; (b) cross-linking the capture agent to the planar sample; (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, and N2, an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N3 and no nucleotide that is complementary to N4 and/or ligating an oligonucleotide that has a labeled nucleotide; and (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition of a nucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents. This cycle may be repeated by (e) inactivating the fluorescent signal, (f) blocking the sample and contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N4 and/or contacting the sample with a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase; and repeating steps (c) (d). In certain embodiments, the method may comprise repeating steps (c), (d), (e) and (f) multiple times.
  • This method can be implemented using a capture agent composition that comprises: a first antibody linked to a first double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the first double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a single nucleotide 5′ overhang comprising base N1; a second antibody linked to a second double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the second double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a single nucleotide 5′ overhang comprising base N2; a third antibody linked to a fourth double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the third double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a two nucleotide 5′ overhang, wherein the first from the 3′ position of the overhang comprises base N4 and the second position comprises N1; and a fourth antibody linked to a fourth double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the fourth double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a two nucleotide 5′ overhang, wherein the first position of the overhang comprises base N4 and the second position comprises base N2, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C. An example of such a population of capture agents is shown in FIG. 4.
  • In certain implementations, the composition may also contain a fifth antibody linked to a fifth double stranded oligonucleotide, wherein the fifth double stranded oligonucleotide comprises a multiple nucleotide 5′ overhang, wherein the first position of the overhang comprises base N4, the second position comprises base N3, and the third position comprises N1 or N2.
  • Overall there is no theoretical limits to the number of co-detected complementary sites, e.g., antigens, both in the case of “reversible terminator” and of “missing base” approach
  • The missing base approach does not use reversible terminators. Instead, extension of a single nucleotide is ensured by using two interchanging bases (e.g., T and C as shown in FIG. 4 instead of the corresponding G in the “reversible terminators” approach) and adding only one of the two dNTPs at a time in the primer extension reaction. After the incorporation of the first nucleotide, the absence of the second dNTP causes strand elongation to stall, thereby ensuring that the primers are extended by only a single nucleotide. As in the previous strategy, all complementary sites can be co-stained simultaneously using capture agents, each labeled with a specific oligonucleotide duplex.
  • In this embodiment, the duplexes can be designed using the strategy shown in FIG. 4, i.e., in such a way that each antibody has the same upper stand oligonucleotide sequence linked to it via covalent bond or through a streptavidin-biotin interaction. In this implementation, the lower strand changes from antibody to antibody. In this method, the general formula for the lower strand is 3′ ddC-sequence-complimentary-to-upper-strand -YA/N2-5′ where Y is composed of bases T and C such that T can be found only in even and C only at odd positions. Or in the more general case 3′-YN1/N2-5′, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and Y is a nucleotide sequence of length n (n is 0, 1 or more) composed of alternating random length stretches of bases N3 and N4 such that the order number of N3— stretches is odd and of N4 stretches is even. In the first simple implementation two base pairs of the lower strand (T and C as in exemplary design on FIG. 4) are reserved for step-wise progression and their complementary pair on the upper strand is never labeled. The other two bases are complementary to labeled nucleotides and can render the staining with two different capture agents per cycle. Such design ensures that a) no two capture agents contain the same duplex and b) only two different antibody are read per cycle. In this implementation, each cycle can have three steps: a labeling step in which the two capture agents are labeled by incorporation of fluorescent dNTPs and all of the other duplexes are extended one base at a time, an imaging step, and a de-staining/reactivation step.
  • In RCA embodiments, the strand linked to the antibodies may be different for each of the antibodies, where the RCA product contains a sequence conforming to the formula described above in each repeat of the RCA product.
  • During cycle-to-cycle transition the labeled capture agents from the prior cycle can be bleached/destained in the same way as described above. Optionally, instead of bleaching, a quencher labeled nucleotide can be incorporated after the labeled base. Because, in this embodiment, the position that is labeled is the last position in the overhang, the labeled capture agents from prior cycle cannot be re-labeled in later cycles because all nucleotide positions in the overhang have been filled in. The performance of “reversible terminator method” as exemplified in sequential detection of CD4 and CD8 positive T-cells in smears of mouse splenocytes is illustrated in FIG. 13, 15 and FIG. 16.
  • Implementation II
  • In this method, extension of a primer by nick translation removes a quencher from a fluorescently labeled “detector” oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the lower strand oligonucleotide in such a way that is positioned downstream from the upper strand primer. The principles of this method are illustrated in FIG. 7. A multiplexed version of this method is shown in FIG. 8.
  • In certain embodiments, the multiplexed implementations may comprise: (a) incubating the planar sample with a plurality of capture agents that are linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide; (b) crosslinking the capture agents to the planar sample; (c) extending a primer that is hybridized to the oligonucleotide of a first set of capture agents of the plurality, thereby generating a first set of fluorescent signals (e.g., by removing the quencher from a labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the oligonucleotide downstream from the primer), e.g., by adding a nucleotide using a polymerase or by adding an oligonucleotide using a ligase; (d) reading the first set of fluorescent signals using fluorescence microscopy; (e) inactivating the fluorescence; (f) extending a primer that is hybridized to the oligonucleotide of a second set of capture agents of the plurality, thereby generating a second set of fluorescent signals (e.g., by removing the quencher from a labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the oligonucleotide downstream from the primer); (g) reading the second set of fluorescent signals using fluorescence microscopy; and (h) comparing the images produce in steps (d) and (g).
  • In this method, the architecture of the double-stranded oligonucleotides linked to the capture agent has a specific design which is effectively enabling rendering of the capture agent binding pattern by “nick translation”. In particular the duplex of the upper strand and the lower strand oligonucleotide with long 5′ overhang of the lower strand is further hybridized to a small detector oligonucleotide labeled both by fluorescent and the quencher. There is a predesigned gap between the initial upper strand and the upper strand detector oligo. During cyclic staining this gap is “walked” by either “reversible terminator” or “missing base” (similar to described in previous sections) until the gap is reduced to a single base nick. Extension and progression through the nick on the upper strand by “nick translating” polymerase such as DNA pol I removes the quencher from some but not all of the quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some but not all of the capture agents.
  • In some embodiments the method generally comprises: (i) labeling a planar sample with: i. a first antibody, wherein the first antibody is linked to a first oligonucleotide duplex comprising, lower strand oligonucleotide with a unique sequence hybridized thereto: (i) an oligonucleotide upper strand “primer” and (ii) a labeled upper strand oligonucleotide comprising a 5′ quencher at a site that is downstream from the primer; and a fluorophore downstream from the quencher and ii. a second antibody, wherein the second antibody is linked to a second oligonucleotide duplex comprising, lower strand oligonucleotide with unique sequence hybridized thereto: (i) an oligonucleotide upper strand “primer” and (ii) an upper strand oligonucleotide labeled both by fluorophore and a quencher; wherein the gap between the 3′ end of the primer and the 5′ end of the labeled oligonucleotide is different for the first and second oligonucleotides; (ii) incubating the tissue sample with a first nucleotide mix and a polymerase, thereby removing the quencher from only the labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the first oligonucleotide and producing a first fluorescent signal; (iii) reading the first fluorescent signal using fluorescence microscopy; (iv) inactivating the fluorescent signal by further progression of nick-translating polymerase; (v) incubating the tissue sample with a second nucleotide mix and a polymerase, thereby removing the quencher from only the labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the second oligonucleotide and producing a first fluorescent signal; and (vi) reading the second fluorescent signal from the planar sample using fluorescence microscopy.
  • FIGS. 7 and 8 show an example of this method. The multiplexing method shown in FIG. 8 has the following steps:
  • Step 1: The planar sample is stained by capture agents that are coupled to a DNA double-stranded oligonucleotide chemically or through streptavidin (as described in FIG. 1) such that the top strand of the duplex contains a nick or a single base deletion followed by a nucleotide stretch bordered by a fluorophore and its quencher on two ends (“molecular beacon” or Taqman based design).
  • Step 2: Staining pattern is rendered by a nick-translation reaction carried out by any 5′ exo+ polymerase such as DnaPolI Klenow fragment in the presence of a single letter (A as in FIG. 5 for example). Nick translation removes the quencher but stops before removing the part of the duplex with the fluorophore.
  • Step 3: For rendering of other staining reagents, the fluorescence is removed by continuing nick translation in the presence of the letters of the stretch bearing the fluorophore.
  • Step 4: When multiplexing is desired, multiplexing can be achieved by special design of oligonucleotide duplexes attached to detection reagents. In particular each antibody set (two or three per cycle) has a gap of an increasing length between the top strand priming and the detector oligonucleotide. This sequence gap on the strand bearing the quencher/fluorophore pair is filled up to final nick in such a way that single base is extended per cycle, similar to how it is achieved in method 1 (see FIG. 8).
  • Implementation III
  • In this implementation, the method comprises rending antibody staining by primer extension with a fluorophore labeled base or otherwise reading a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between a first fluorescent nucleotide added to the primer by primer extension and a second nucleotide that is present in the oligonucleotide FIG. 10. The principles of this method are illustrated in FIG. 9A. The multiplexing is achieved by removing the extension priming oligonucleotide by melting the duplex or by exonuclease and reannealing another primer oligonucleotide which is extendable on a different antibody. A multiplexed version of this method is shown in FIG. 9B. In certain embodiments, the multiplexed implementations may comprise: (a) incubating the planar sample with a plurality of capture agents; (b) cross-linking the capture agents to the planar sample; (c) extending a primer that is hybridized to the oligonucleotide of a first set of capture agents of the plurality (e.g., wherein the 3′ end of the first primer anneals to only the oligonucleotide of the first population), thereby generating a first set of fluorescent signals (which step can be done by adding a labeled nucleotide using polymerase and/or contacting the sample with a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase); (d) reading the first set of fluorescent signals using fluorescence microscopy; (e) inactivating the fluorescence; (f) extending a primer that hybridized to the oligonucleotide of a second set of capture agents of the plurality (e.g., wherein the 3′ end of the first primer anneals to only the oligonucleotide of the second population), thereby generating a second set of fluorescent signals (which step can also be done by adding a labeled nucleotide using polymerase and/or contacting the sample with a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase); (g) reading the second set of fluorescent signals using fluorescence microscopy; and (h) comparing the images produce in steps (d) and (g).
  • In certain embodiments, this method comprises: (a) incubating the planar sample with (i) a first antibody that is linked to a first labeled oligonucleotide and (ii) a second antibody that is linked to a second labeled oligonucleotide, (b) cross-linking the capture agents to the planar sample; (c) hybridizing the first and second labeled oligonucleotides with a first primer, wherein the 3′ end of the first primer anneals to only the first labeled oligonucleotide; (d) extending the primer with a fluorescent nucleotide (which step can be done by adding a labeled nucleotide using polymerase and/or contacting the sample with a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase); (e) reading, by fluorescence microscopy, a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between the label of the first oligonucleotide and the fluorescent nucleotide added to the first primer; (f) inactivating the fluorescent nucleotide added to the first primer; (g) hybridizing the first and second labeled oligonucleotides with a second primer, wherein the 3′ end of the second primer anneals to only the second labeled oligonucleotide; (h) extending the second primer with a fluorescent nucleotide; and (i) reading, by fluorescence microscopy, a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between the label of the second oligonucleotide and the fluorescent nucleotide added to the second primer.
  • FIGS. 9-10 shows an example of this method. The method shown in FIGS. 8-11 has the following steps:
  • Step 1: The planar sample is stained using a capture agent that is coupled to a single stranded oligonucleotide. The oligonucleotide could be either unlabeled or labeled by FRET acceptor (e.g. Cy5) fluorophore on the 3′ end.
  • Step 2: The binding pattern can be determined by an on-slide hybridization of a complementary probe followed a primer extension reaction in which a fluorescently labeled nucleotide fills in the overhang in the extended strand. In this example (see FIG. 10) the extended base is labeled by a FRET donor (e.g. Cy3), which can increase the signal to noise ratio. If the oligonucleotide that is linked to the capture agent is unlabeled, then the fluorescent emission of the nucleotide that has been incorporated by DNA synthesis can be detected directly, without FRET FIG. 9.
  • Step 3: The binding pattern of other capture agents can be determined by removing the fluorescence by cleavage of lower strand by exo+ DNA polymerase such as Vent (FIG. 9). Alternatively, the fluorescence can be removed by raising the temperature beyond the melting point of the DNA strands or by one of the de-staining techniques described previously.
  • Step 4: Multiplexing can be achieved by staining of the sample with a library of capture agents each labeled with specific oligonucleotides and cycling through Steps 1-3, as described above, each time using a different detection oligonucleotide that is complementary to one of the capture agent-conjugated oligonucleotides. Only duplexes where primers are annealed specifically will be properly extended (FIG. 11). In these embodiments, each primers is designed so that its 3′ end hybridizes to only one of the oligonucleotides that are linked to a capture agent.
  • Further Implementations
  • As schematically illustrated in FIG. 16, the signal may be amplified using rolling circle amplification. In these embodiments, a capture agent that is linked to an oligonucleotide is hybridized to a padlock probe that hybridizes to the oligonucleotide in such a way that the ends of the padlock probe are ligatably adjacent. In this embodiment, after ligation, the padlock probe (which is now circularized) can be copied by a rolling circle amplification reaction that is primed by the oligonucleotide. This reaction results in a concatamer of the padlock probe that contains several (in many cases hundreds or thousands) of copies of the same sequence in tandem that is linked to the capture agent. The rolling circle amplification product (which is linked to the antibody) can be detected using methods described above and, as illustrated, the signal is amplified because the sequence being detected is repeated. In these embodiments, the (i) the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand (i.e., the RCA product) and a second strand (comprising the detection oligonucleotides). Single molecules can be detected using such methods.
  • FIG. 19 shows how RNA molecules can be detected using a padlock probe/RCA amplification approach. In this method, the padlock probe hybridizes to the same mRNA as the capture agent (the “splint-primer”), thereby ensuring that the padlock probe circularizes only in the presence of the target RNA. In this embodiment, the splint-primer hybridizes to the target RNA, acts as a splint for the padlock probe, and also acts as a primer for rolling circle amplification, thereby allowing the signal to be amplified in a similar to FIG. 16.
  • FIG. 20 shows an alternative method that relies on primer extension and the ligation of a short, labeled oligonucleotide. In this embodiment, ligation of short labeled oligonucleotide to the top strand oligonucleotide only occurs after the overhang has been filed in to a certain point. In embodiments that rely on ligation, a labeled oligonucleotide can be added to either the 3′ end or the 5′ end of the extendible end.
  • Utility
  • The methods and compositions described herein find general use in a wide variety of application for analysis of any planar sample (e.g., in the analysis of tissue sections, sheets of cells, spun-down cells, blots of electrophoresis gels, Western blots, dot-blots, ELISAs, antibody microarrays, nucleic acid microarrays etc).
  • In particular embodiments, the planar sample may be a section of a tissue biopsy obtained from a patient. Biopsies of interest include both tumor and non-neoplastic biopsies of skin (melanomas, carcinomas, etc.), soft tissue, bone, breast, colon, liver, kidney, adrenal, gastrointestinal, pancreatic, gall bladder, salivary gland, cervical, ovary, uterus, testis, prostate, lung, thymus, thyroid, parathyroid, pituitary (adenomas, etc.), brain, spinal cord, ocular, nerve, and skeletal muscle, etc.
  • In certain embodiments, capture agents specifically bind to biomarkers, including cancer biomarkers, that may be proteinaceous or a nucleic acid. Exemplary cancer biomarkers, include, but are not limited to carcinoembryonic antigen (for identification of adenocarcinomas), cytokeratins (for identification of carcinomas but may also be expressed in some sarcomas), CD15 and CD30 (for Hodgkin's disease), alpha fetoprotein (for yolk sac tumors and hepatocellular carcinoma), CD117 (for gastrointestinal stromal tumors), CD10 (for renal cell carcinoma and acute lymphoblastic leukemia), prostate specific antigen (for prostate cancer), estrogens and progesterone (for tumour identification), CD20 (for identification of B-cell lymphomas) and CD3 (for identification of T-cell lymphomas). The above-described method can be used to analyze cells from a subject to determine, for example, whether the cell is normal or not or to determine whether the cells are responding to a treatment. In one embodiment, the method may be employed to determine the degree of dysplasia in cancer cells. In these embodiments, the cells may be a sample from a multicellular organism. A biological sample may be isolated from an individual, e.g., from a soft tissue. In particular cases, the method may be used to distinguish different types of cancer cells in FFPE samples.
  • The method described above finds particular utility in examining planar samples using a plurality of antibodies, each antibodies recognizing a different marker. Examples of cancers, and biomarkers that can be used to identify those cancers, are shown below. In these embodiments, one does not need to examine all of the markers listed below in order to make a diagnosis.
  • Acute Leukemia IHC Panel CD3, CD7, CD20, CD34, CD45, CD56, CD117, MPO, PAX-5,
    and TdT.
    Adenocarcinoma vs. Mesothelioma IHC Pan-CK, CEA, MOC-31, BerEP4, TTF1, calretinin, and WT-1.
    Panel
    Bladder vs. Prostate Carcinoma IHC Panel CK7, CK20, PSA, CK 903, and p63.
    Breast IHC Panel ER, PR, Ki-67, and HER2. Reflex to HER2 FISH after HER2
    IHC is available.
    Burkitt vs. DLBC Lymphoma IHC panel BCL-2, c-MYC, Ki-67.
    Carcinoma Unknown Primary Site, Female CK7, CK20, mammaglobin ER, TTF1, CEA, CA19-9, S100,
    (CUPS IHC Panel - Female) synaptophysin, and WT-1.
    Carcinoma Unknown Primary Site, Male CK7, CK20, TTF1, PSA, CEA, CA19-9, S100, and
    (CUPS IHC Panel - Male) synaptophysin.
    GIST IHC Panel CD117, DOG-1, CD34, and desmin.
    Hepatoma/Cholangio vs. Metastatic HSA (HepPar 1), CDX2, CK7, CK20, CAM 5.2, TF-1, and
    Carcinoma IHC Panel CEA (polyclonal).
    Hodgkin vs. NHL IHC Panel BOB-1, BCL-6, CD3, CD10, CD15, CD20, CD30, CD45 LCA,
    CD79a, MUM1, OCT-2, PAX-5, and EBER ISH.
    Lung Cancer IHC Panel chromogranin A, synaptophysin, CK7, p63, and TTF-1.
    Lung vs. Metastatic Breast Carcinoma IHC TTF1, mammaglobin, GCDFP-15 (BRST-2), and ER.
    Panel
    Lymphoma Phenotype IHC Panel BCL-2, BCL-6, CD3, CD4, CD5, CD7, CD8, CD10, CD15,
    CD20, CD30, CD79a, CD138, cyclin D1, Ki67, MUM1, PAX-
    5, TdT, and EBER ISH.
    Lymphoma vs. Carcinoma IHC Panel CD30, CD45, CD68, CD117, pan-keratin, MPO, S100, and
    synaptophysin.
    Lymphoma vs. Reactive Hyperplasia IHC BCL-2, BCL-6, CD3, CD5, CD10, CD20, CD23, CD43, cyclin
    Panel D1, and Ki-67.
    Melanoma vs. Squamous Cell Carcinoma CD68, Factor XIIIa, CEA (polyclonal), S-100, melanoma
    IHC Panel cocktail (HMB-45, MART-1/Melan-A, tyrosinase) and Pan-
    CK.
    Mismatch Repair Proteins IHC Panel MLH1, MSH2, MSH6, and PMS2.
    (MMR/Colon Cancer)
    Neuroendocrine Neoplasm IHC Panel CD56, synaptophysin, chromogranin A, TTF-1, Pan-CK, and
    CEA (polyclonal).
    Plasma Cell Neoplasm IHC Panel CD19, CD20, CD38, CD43, CD56, CD79a, CD138, cyclin D1,
    EMA, kappa, lambda, and MUM1.
    Prostate vs. Colon Carcinoma IHC Panel CDX2, CK 20, CEA (monoclonal), CA19-9, PLAP, CK 7, and
    PSA.
    Soft Tissue Tumor IHC Panel Pan-CK, SMA, desmin, S100, CD34, vimentin, and CD68.
    T-Cell Lymphoma IHC panel ALK1, CD2, CD3, CD4, CD5, CD7, CD8, CD10, CD20,
    CD21, CD30, CD56, TdT, and EBER ISH.
    T-LGL Leukemia IHC panel CD3, CD8, granzyme B, and TIA-1.
    Undifferentiated Tumor IHC Panel Pan-CK, S100, CD45, and vimentin.
  • In some embodiments, the method may be employed to detect the location and, optionally, the abundance of DNA molecules and/or RNA molecules in situ. In one exemplary embodiment, the method may be used to detect intracellular RNAs. In these embodiments, the capture agent may be a nucleic acid, and the intracellular location and, optionally, the abundance of RNA molecules (e.g., mRNAs or lncRNAs) may be detected in situ. Such hybridization methods may be adapted from known RNA or DNA FISH methods (see, e.g., Mahadevaiah et al (Methods Mol Biol. 2009 558:433-44), Shaffer et al (PLoS One. 2013 8:e75120) and Pollex et al (Methods Mol. Biol. 2013 1042:13-31), which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • In some embodiments, the method may involve obtaining an image as described above (an electronic form of which may have been forwarded from a remote location) and may be analyzed by a doctor or other medical professional to determine whether a patient has abnormal cells (e.g., cancerous cells) or which type of abnormal cells are present. The image may be used as a diagnostic to determine whether the subject has a disease or condition, e.g., a cancer. In certain embodiments, the method may be used to determine the stage of a cancer, to identify metastasized cells, or to monitor a patient's response to a treatment, for example.
  • The compositions and methods described herein can be used to diagnose a patient with a disease. In some cases, the presence or absence of a biomarker in the patient's sample can indicate that the patient has a particular disease (e.g., cancer). In some cases, a patient can be diagnosed with a disease by comparing a sample from the patient with a sample from a healthy control. In this example, a level of a biomarker, relative to the control, can be measured. A difference in the level of a biomarker in the patient's sample relative to the control can be indicative of disease. In some cases, one or more biomarkers are analyzed in order to diagnose a patient with a disease. The compositions and methods of the disclosure are particularly suited to identifying the presence or absence of, or determining expression levels, of a plurality of biomarkers in a sample.
  • In some cases, the compositions and methods herein can be used to determine a treatment plan for a patient. The presence or absence of a biomarker may indicate that a patient is responsive to or refractory to a particular therapy. For example, a presence or absence of one or more biomarkers may indicate that a disease is refractory to a specific therapy and an alternative therapy can be administered. In some cases, a patient is currently receiving the therapy and the presence or absence of one or more biomarkers may indicate that the therapy is no longer effective.
  • In any embodiment, data can be forwarded to a “remote location”, where “remote location,” means a location other than the location at which the image is examined. For example, a remote location could be another location (e.g., office, lab, etc.) in the same city, another location in a different city, another location in a different state, another location in a different country, etc. As such, when one item is indicated as being “remote” from another, what is meant is that the two items can be in the same room but separated, or at least in different rooms or different buildings, and can be at least one mile, ten miles, or at least one hundred miles apart. “Communicating” information references transmitting the data representing that information as electrical signals over a suitable communication channel (e.g., a private or public network). “Forwarding” an item refers to any means of getting that item from one location to the next, whether by physically transporting that item or otherwise (where that is possible) and includes, at least in the case of data, physically transporting a medium carrying the data or communicating the data. Examples of communicating media include radio or infra-red transmission channels as well as a network connection to another computer or networked device, and the internet or including email transmissions and information recorded on websites and the like. In certain embodiments, the image may be analyzed by an MD or other qualified medical professional, and a report based on the results of the analysis of the image may be forwarded to the patient from which the sample was obtained.
  • In some cases, the method may be employed in a variety of diagnostic, drug discovery, and research applications that include, but are not limited to, diagnosis or monitoring of a disease or condition (where the image identifies a marker for the disease or condition), discovery of drug targets (where the a marker in the image may be targeted for drug therapy), drug screening (where the effects of a drug are monitored by a marker shown in the image), determining drug susceptibility (where drug susceptibility is associated with a marker) and basic research (where is it desirable to measure the differences between cells in a sample).
  • In certain embodiments, two different samples may be compared using the above methods. The different samples may be composed of an “experimental” sample, i.e., a sample of interest, and a “control” sample to which the experimental sample may be compared. In many embodiments, the different samples are pairs of cell types or fractions thereof, one cell type being a cell type of interest, e.g., an abnormal cell, and the other a control, e.g., normal, cell. If two fractions of cells are compared, the fractions are usually the same fraction from each of the two cells. In certain embodiments, however, two fractions of the same cell may be compared. Exemplary cell type pairs include, for example, cells isolated from a tissue biopsy (e.g., from a tissue having a disease such as colon, breast, prostate, lung, skin cancer, or infected with a pathogen etc.) and normal cells from the same tissue, usually from the same patient; cells grown in tissue culture that are immortal (e.g., cells with a proliferative mutation or an immortalizing transgene), infected with a pathogen, or treated (e.g., with environmental or chemical agents such as peptides, hormones, altered temperature, growth condition, physical stress, cellular transformation, etc.), and a normal cell (e.g., a cell that is otherwise identical to the experimental cell except that it is not immortal, infected, or treated, etc.); a cell isolated from a mammal with a cancer, a disease, a geriatric mammal, or a mammal exposed to a condition, and a cell from a mammal of the same species, preferably from the same family, that is healthy or young; and differentiated cells and non-differentiated cells from the same mammal (e.g., one cell being the progenitor of the other in a mammal, for example). In one embodiment, cells of different types, e.g., neuronal and non-neuronal cells, or cells of different status (e.g., before and after a stimulus on the cells) may be employed. In another embodiment of the invention, the experimental material is cells susceptible to infection by a pathogen such as a virus, e.g., human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), etc., and the control material is cells resistant to infection by the pathogen. In another embodiment, the sample pair is represented by undifferentiated cells, e.g., stem cells, and differentiated cells.
  • The images produced by the method may be viewed side-by-side or, in some embodiments, the images may be superimposed or combined. In some cases, the images may be in color, where the colors used in the images may correspond to the labels used.
  • Cells any organism, e.g., from bacteria, yeast, plants and animals, such as fish, birds, reptiles, amphibians and mammals may be used in the subject methods. In certain embodiments, mammalian cells, i.e., cells from mice, rabbits, primates, or humans, or cultured derivatives thereof, may be used.
  • Computer Systems
  • The invention also provides a computer system that is configured to implement the methods of the disclosure. The system can include a computer server (“server”) that is programmed to implement the methods described herein. FIG. 21 depicts a system 1600 adapted to enable a user to detect, analyze, and process images of samples. The system 1600 includes a central computer server 1601 that is programmed to implement exemplary methods described herein. The server 1601 includes a central processing unit (CPU, also “processor”) 1605 which can be a single core processor, a multi core processor, or plurality of processors for parallel processing. The server 1601 also includes memory 1610 (e.g. random access memory, read-only memory, flash memory); electronic storage unit 1615 (e.g. hard disk); communications interface 1620 (e.g. network adaptor) for communicating with one or more other systems; and peripheral devices 1625 which may include cache, other memory, data storage, and/or electronic display adaptors. The memory 1610, storage unit 1615, interface 1620, and peripheral devices 1625 are in communication with the processor 1605 through a communications bus (solid lines), such as a motherboard. The storage unit 1615 can be a data storage unit for storing data. The server 1601 is operatively coupled to a computer network (“network”) 1630 with the aid of the communications interface 1620. The network 1630 can be the Internet, an intranet and/or an extranet, an intranet and/or extranet that is in communication with the Internet, a telecommunication or data network. The network 1630 in some cases, with the aid of the server 1601, can implement a peer-to-peer network, which may enable devices coupled to the server 1601 to behave as a client or a server. A microscope can be a peripheral device 1625 or a remote computer system 1640.
  • The storage unit 1615 can store files, such as individual images, time lapse images, data about individual cells, data about individual biomarkers, images showing a pattern of binding of capture agents to a sample, or any aspect of data associated with the invention. The data storage unit 1615 may be coupled with data relating to locations of cells in a virtual grid.
  • The server can communicate with one or more remote computer systems through the network 1630. The one or more remote computer systems may be, for example, personal computers, laptops, tablets, telephones, Smart phones, or personal digital assistants.
  • In some situations the system 1600 includes a single server 1601. In other situations, the system includes multiple servers in communication with one another through an intranet, extranet and/or the Internet.
  • Methods as described herein can be implemented by way of machine (e.g., computer processor) computer readable medium (or software) stored on an electronic storage location of the server 1601, such as, for example, on the memory 1610, or electronic storage unit 1615. During use, the code can be executed by the processor 1605. In some cases, the code can be retrieved from the storage unit 1615 and stored on the memory 1610 for ready access by the processor 1605. In some situations, the electronic storage unit 1615 can be precluded, and machine-executable instructions are stored on memory 1610. Alternatively, the code can be executed on a second computer system 1640.
  • Aspects of the systems and methods provided herein, such as the server 1601, can be embodied in programming. Various aspects of the technology may be thought of as “products” or “articles of manufacture” typically in the form of machine (or processor) executable code and/or associated data that is carried on or embodied in a type of machine readable medium (e.g., computer readable medium). Machine-executable code can be stored on an electronic storage unit, such memory (e.g., read-only memory, random-access memory, flash memory) or a hard disk. “Storage” type media can include any or all of the tangible memory of the computers, processors or the like, or associated modules thereof, such as various semiconductor memories, tape drives, disk drives and the like, which may provide non-transitory storage at any time for the software programming. All or portions of the software may at times be communicated through the Internet or various other telecommunication networks. Such communications, for example, may enable loading of the software from one computer or processor into another, for example, from a management server or host computer into the computer platform of an application server. Thus, another type of media that may bear the software elements includes optical, electrical, and electromagnetic waves, such as used across physical interfaces between local devices, through wired and optical landline networks and over various air-links. The physical elements that carry such waves, such as wired or wireless likes, optical links, or the like, also may be considered as media bearing the software. As used herein, unless restricted to non-transitory, tangible “storage” media, terms such as computer or machine “readable medium” refer to any medium that participates in providing instructions to a processor for execution.
  • Hence, a machine readable medium, such as computer-executable code, may take many forms, including but not limited to, tangible storage medium, a carrier wave medium, or physical transmission medium. Non-volatile storage media can include, for example, optical or magnetic disks, such as any of the storage devices in any computer(s) or the like, such may be used to implement the system. Tangible transmission media can include: coaxial cables, copper wires, and fiber optics (including the wires that comprise a bus within a computer system). Carrier-wave transmission media may take the form of electric or electromagnetic signals, or acoustic or light waves such as those generated during radio frequency (RF) and infrared (IR) data communications. Common forms of computer-readable media therefore include, for example: a floppy disk, a flexible disk, hard disk, magnetic tape, any other magnetic medium, a CD-ROM, DVD, DVD-ROM, any other optical medium, punch cards, paper tame, any other physical storage medium with patterns of holes, a RAM, a ROM, a PROM and EPROM, a FLASH-EPROM, any other memory chip or cartridge, a carrier wave transporting data or instructions, cables, or links transporting such carrier wave, or any other medium from which a computer may read programming code and/or data. Many of these forms of computer readable media may be involved in carrying one or more sequences of one or more instructions to a processor for execution.
  • The results of the sample staining or labeling can be presented to a user with the aid of a user interface, such as a graphical user interface.
  • Kits
  • In some aspects, the disclosure herein provides for kits. The kits can comprise any number of compositions to perform the methods of the disclosure, each of which have been described herein. For example, a kit may comprise at least one capture agent. The capture agent can be an antibody, an aptamer, or an oligonucleotide probe. The capture agent can be custom-made to specifically bind to a desired target. For example, a user may custom-order one or more capture agents to be included in the kit. In some cases, the capture agents can be sold separately. The capture agents can specifically bind to a target molecule of interest. Additionally or alternatively, capture agents can be ordered as a panel (i.e., a pre-determined selection of capture agents). The panel can be specific for a particular type of disease (e.g., cancer) or a particular sub-type of a disease (e.g., colon cancer). A kit of the disclosure can also include one or more oligonucleotides. The oligonucleotides can comprise a first strand and a double strand, as described herein. The oligonucleotides can be provided as single-stranded oligonucleotides or as double-stranded oligonucleotides. In the latter case, the kit can include reagents and/or instructions for annealing the first strand and the second strand of oligonucleotides to produce double-stranded oligonucleotides. The single- or double-stranded oligonucleotides can be conjugated to the capture agents or can be provided unconjugated. In the latter case, reagents can be included in the kit for conjugating the double-stranded oligonucleotides to the capture agents (e.g., reagents to perform Click chemistry). In some cases, the kit may provide a plurality of oligonucleotides wherein each of the first strands is the same and each of the second strands is different. The kit can further comprise any nucleotide mixture disclosed herein. Nucleotide mixtures can comprise any combination of fluorescent nucleotides, unlabeled nucleotides, reversible terminator nucleotides, and the like. Generally, the nucleotide mixture provided in the kit will be compatible with the provided oligonucleotides. The kit can further comprise, without limitation, a polymerase for performing primer extension, a reagent for inactivating a signal (e.g., TCEP), a blocking solution (e.g., iodoacetamide solution), and any buffer or solution suitable to perform the methods herein. The kit can comprise any reagent for preparing a sample for labeling such as a fixative (e.g., formaldehyde) or reagents for embedding a sample (i.e., paraffin wax). The kit can further comprise a control sample for comparison with a test sample. The control sample can be a healthy sample or a diseased sample. The control sample may be matched to the tissue or cell type under investigation or to the disease being studied. In some cases, the control sample may be a positive control or a negative control.
  • EMBODIMENTS
  • A method for analyzing a planar sample is provided. In certain embodiments, the method comprises: (a) incubating the planar sample with a capture agent under conditions by which the capture agent specifically binds to complementary sites in the planar sample, wherein: (i) the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide that comprises a first strand and a second strand; (ii) the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide by the 5′ end of the first strand; and (iii) the 3′ end of the first strand is recessed relative to the 5′ end of the second strand, thereby producing an overhang; (b) crosslinking the capture agent to planar sample; (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix, thereby adding one or more nucleotides to the overhang; and/or contacting the planar sample with a mixture of short oligonucleotides, some of which may be labelled or not, and a DNA ligase and (d) reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the one or more nucleotides to the overhang using fluorescence microscopy, thereby producing an image showing the pattern of binding of the capture agent to the planar sample. In some embodiments, after the sample has been read, this method may involve removing the fluorescent moiety and deprotecting an added fluorescent nucleotide, thereby allowing the method to be repeated.
  • In any embodiment, step (c) may comprise contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises a fluorescent nucleotide, thereby adding the fluorescent nucleotide to the overhang, or contacting to planar sample with one or more fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides, thereby adding a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide to the overhang; and step (d) comprises reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotide or oligonucleotide to the overhang. In this embodiment, the fluorescent signal may be: emitted directly from the added nucleotide or oligonucleotide, a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two fluorescent nucleotides that are added to the overhang or a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between a first fluorescent nucleotide added to overhang and a second fluorescent nucleotide that is present in the second strand.
  • In some embodiments, extension of the first strand removes a quencher from a quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the second strand, downstream from the first strand.
  • In any embodiment, the sample may be a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded (FFPE) section.
  • Also provided herein is a capture agent that is linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide, wherein: (i) the double-stranded oligonucleotide comprises a first strand and a second strand; (ii) the capture agent is linked to the 5′ end of the first strand; and (iii) the 3′ end of the first strand is recessed relative to the 5′ end of the second strand, thereby producing an overhang or (iiii) the 5′ end is recessed relative to the 3′ end of the second strand, there producing and overhang
  • Also provided herein is a capture agent composition comprising a plurality of capture agents that recognize different complementary sites, wherein: each of the capture agents is linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide that comprises a first strand and a second strand; the capture agents are linked to a double-stranded oligonucleotide by the 5′ end of first strand; the 3′ end of the first strand in each of the double-stranded oligonucleotides is recessed relative to the 5′ end of the second strand, thereby producing an overhang; and the overhang is different for each of the capture agents. Alternatively, the 5′ end is recessed relative to the 3′ end of the second strand, there producing and overhang that is specific to each capture agent. In this embodiment, the sequence of the first strand may be the same for each of the capture agents; and the sequence of the second strand may be different for each of the capture agents.
  • In these embodiments, the overhangs may be of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more, or the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of bases N3 and N4, and wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
  • A method for analyzing a tissue sample is also provided. In these embodiments, the method may comprise (a) incubating a planar sample with a capture agent composition of a prior embodiment under conditions by which the capture agents specifically bind to sites in the planar sample; (b) crosslinking capture agents to planar sample; (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and either an incomplete nucleotide mix or a nucleotide mix that comprises a reversible terminator nucleotide and/or a ligase and a labeled oligonucleotide; and (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition a nucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents.
  • In this embodiment, the method may comprise: (c) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and: (i) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4 or (ii) a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, and N2, an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N3, and no nucleotide that is complementary to N4, thereby adding fluorescent nucleotides onto the double-stranded oligonucleotides of some but not all of the capture agents. This step can also be done by ligation, i.e., by contacting the planar sample with a labeled oligonucleotide (or a mixture of the same), where addition of the labeled oligonucleotide depends on the underlying sequence of the overhang. This method also comprises: (d) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition of a fluorescent nucleotide to some but not all of the capture agents. In these embodiments, the overhangs may be of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more; and step (c) comprises contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4. This step can also be implemented by addition of a labeled oligonucleotide using a ligase. In these embodiments, the method may comprise (e) inactivating the fluorescent signal, deprotecting the reversible terminator nucleotide and blocking the sample; and (f) repeating steps (c) and (d). In some cases, step (f) may comprise repeating steps (c), (d) and (e) multiple times. Alternatively, the overhangs may be of the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of bases N3 and N4, and wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C. In these embodiments, the method may further comprise (e) inactivating the fluorescent signal and contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N4; and (f) repeating steps (c) and (d). In some cases, step (f) may comprise repeating steps (c), (d) and (e) multiple times.
  • In some embodiments, the double-stranded oligonucleotides each comprise a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide hybridized to the second strand downstream from first strand, wherein the fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide comprises a quencher and extension of the first strand removes the quencher from some but not all of the quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some but not all of the capture agents.
  • Example I Materials and Methods
  • Spleen cells fixed in 2% formaldehyde, permeablized and stored in methanol at −80 were spun from methanol, resuspended and washed with buffer 4 (10 mM Tris &. 5, 10 mM MgCl2, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton×100) for 5 min on a rotator. To block against non-specific binding of ab-oligonucleotide complexes cells were further spun, resuspended in lml PBS, 0.5% BSA (SM) and supplemented up to additional 0.5M NaCl (0.9 ml SM+100 ul 5M NaCl). 20 ul of sheared ssDNA (10 mg/ml), 50 ul of mouse IgG (10 mg/ml) and 20 ul of 0.5M EDTA were further added to lml of cells and the mix was incubated for 30 min on a rotator. For staining cells were redistributed into 30 250 ul tubes (PCR strip tubes is a convenient choice for that matter) with premade antibody/oligonucleotide complexes (0.2 ug of CD45-146 complex was annealed with 1 ul of specific oligonucleotide (147 etc) per tube 30 min at 40 C) and incubated for 1 h with rotation. Cells were washed in (PBS, 0.1% Triton 0.5M salt 5 mM EDTA) twice, placed on poly-lysine treated glass coverslips, allowed to stand/attach for 10 min and further fixed with 5 mM BS3 (7.4 mg per 4 ml) in PBS, 0.1% Triton, 0.5M NaCl, 5 mM EDTA for 1 hour.
  • Staining was rendered in cycles. For odd cycles (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15) coverslips were incubated for 2 min in dG/dU mix (150 nM dG, 150 nM dUssCy5, 150 nM dCssCy3, 25 ul NEB exo−Klenow per ml in buffer#4 (10 mM Tris 7.5, 0.5M NaCl, 0.1% Triton×100, 10 mM MgCl2)), washed twice with 405 (buffet#4 supplemented up to 0.65M NaCl); and imaged by confocal microscopy. Following imaging the fluorophores were cleaved off cells by incubation in 50 mM TCEP for 2 min in buffer 405E (10 mM Tris 7.5, 0.5M NaCl, 0.1% Triton×100, 5 mM EDTA). After cleavage cells were washed in 405E and blocked for for 1 min in iodoacetamide solution (FRESHLY made 100 mM iodoacetamide in buffer 405E). The blocking solution was removed by two washes with buffer#4. Before proceeding to next cycle cells were again imaged by confocal microscopy. Even cycles (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14) were performed same as odd cycles except for substitution of dG with dA in labeling step and extension of cleavage to 4 min at room temperature.
  • Preliminary Data.
  • To explore the possibility of in situ staining by primer extension expression of CD4 was visualized in mouse spleen cells in suspension (FIG. 11) or immobilized on a slide. (FIG. 12). To visualize the T lymphocytes spleen cells were co-stained with conventional TcrB-Ax488 antibody. Both samples were stained with CD4 antibody conjugated to oligonucleotide duplex as in (FIG. 11 A). No Klenow polymerase was added in control samples which results in no separation of TcrB positive T-cells into subsets (FIG. 11 B). When Klenow polymerase was supplied. CD4 positive T-cells could be observed as a Cy5 positive subset of TcrB positive T-cells (FIG. 11 C and FIG. 12). Clear membrane staining pattern was observed by confocal imaging of cells stained on-slide (FIG. 12 A). Taken together this data shows that on-slide primer extension reaction can be used for rendering the capture agent binding pattern
  • FIG. 11. Flow cytometric analysis of mouse spleen cells stained by primer extension. Mouse spleen cells were fixed and permeabilized with methanol as done for intracellular protein staining Cells were co-stained with conventional TcrB-Ax488 antibody and CD4 antibody conjugated to oligonucleotide duplex as in (A). After staining cells were either incubated in extension buffer with dUTP-Cy5 without (B) or with (C) Klenow exopolymerase. Note that TcrB positive T-cells in (B) are indicated by Ax-488 staining Dependent upon the addition of Klenow, TcrB positive CD4 positive T-cells are seen as a Cy5 positive subset of TcrB positive T-cells in (C).
  • FIG. 12. On-slide analysis of mouse spleen cells stained by primer extension. Mouse spleen cells were fixed and permeabilized with methanol as done for intracellular protein staining Cells were attached to poly-Lysine coated slide and co-stained with conventional TcrB-Ax488 antibody and CD4 antibody conjugated to oligonucleotide duplex as in FIG. 12 A. After staining, cells were incubated in extension buffer with dUTP-Cy5 Klenow exo polymerase and visualized by confocal microscopy. Shown are DIC image in C, Cy5 channel in A, Ax488 channel in B and merged Ax488 and Cy5 channels in D. Note that only a subset of TcrB-Ax488 positive T-cells in (B) are rendered Cy5 positive CD4 positive T-cells by primer extension as seen in (A). The membrane pattern of CD4 points to specificity of staining by primer extension as it takes place at a particular expected subcellular localization.
  • To prove the possibility of multiplexed detection of several antigens by primer extension, the expression of CD4 and CD8 was co-analyzed in mouse spleen cells immobilized on a slide by Method 1 and, specifically, the multiplexing approach based on “reversible terminators”. The cells were simultaneously stained by CD4 and CD8 antibodies conjugated to oligonucleotide duplexes as in (FIG. 14, A) simultaneously. Two cycles of rendering were performed such that CD8 was visualized in the first cycle (FIG. 14, C) and CD4 in the second (FIG. 14, D). Cells were counterstained with TcrB-Ax488 to delineate T-lynphocytes in the spleen cells. As expected CD4 positive cells were rendered as a subset of TcrB positive T-cells mutually exclusive with CD8-positive subset of T-lymphocytes (FIG. 14, A-D). The data suggests that rendering antibody staining by polymer (DNA-duplex) extension is an approach enabling sensitive antigen detection and multiplexing.
  • FIG. 13. Two cycle analysis of CD4 and CD8 staining in mouse spleen using Method 1 with reversible terminators. Mouse spleen cells were fixed and permeabilized with methanol as done for intracellular protein staining Cells were attached to poly-Lysine coated slide and co-stained with conventional TcrB-Ax488 antibody and a mixture of CD4 and CD8 antibodies conjugated to oligos as indicated on (A). For the first cycle of staining the cells were incubated in extension buffer with Illumina reversible terminators and Klenow exo polymerase and visualized by confocal microscopy (C). Following the imaging after the first cycle, cells were destained by Illumina cleavage buffer containing TCEP. Following destaining-terminator reactivation, cells were again incubated in extension buffer with Illumina reversible terminators and Klenow exo polymerase and visualized by confocal microscopy (D) Note that four T-cells identified by high levels of TcrB and marked by four white arrows on (B). It becomes evident after the first cycle of staining that two of these cells are CD8a positive (marked by purple arrows on (C). Second cycle of staining reveals that the other two cells are CD4 positive (marked by green arrows on (D). The expected mutual exclusivity of CD4 and CD8a as well as membrane pattern of incorporated labeled nucleotide further supports the specificity of staining by cycles of primer extension.
  • The “missing base” multiplexing approach was tested on a model of heterogeneous tissue containing multiplicity of distinct cellular subsets (FIG. 14). To this end leukocytes from homogenized mouse spleen were divided into 30 samples. 30 different versions of CD45 were made by conjugating purified CD45 to common upper strand oligonucleotide and then separately annealing 30 different lower strand oligonucleotides designed to create overhangs that can be sequentially rendered (two per cycle) in the multiplexed version of “missing base approach”. The samples were individually stained (barcoded) by 30 CD45 antibody conjugates, the unbound CD45 was washed off the barcoded samples were mixed and attached to a slide. The staining of this mixture of pseudotyped cells was rendered by “missing base” approach. Six first cycles (12 populations, 2 red and green per cycle) as well as inactivation of fluorescence by cleaving the fluorophore off the modified base by TCEP between the cycles is shown on FIG. 15. As can be seen no same two cells are stained in each cycle and between the cycles proving that on-cell primer extension reliably renders the specific antibody staining.
  • In order to test the performance and multiplexing capacity of “missing base” method the following model approach was employed, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15. Mouse CD45 antibody was chemically conjugated to an “upper strand” oligonucleotide (oligonucleotide id-146). The conjugated antibody was further divided and separately annealed (by 30 min co-incubation at 40 C) to 30 different “lower strand” oligonucleotides—thus effectively creating 30 different species of CD45 antibody. The 30 “lower strand” oligonucleotides were designed in accordance with “missing base” strategy and in addition in such a way that 2 antibodies could be rendered per cycle using two bases (dUTP and dCTP) reversibly (through s-s linker) coupled with distinct fluorophores (Cy5 and Cy3). 30 samples of homogenized mouse spleen have been “barcoded” with these CD45-oligonucleotide duplex complexes such way that majority of cells in each sample became labeled with a particular CD45-upper/lower oligonucleotide combination. Following staining and washing the samples were combined to mimic a tissue with 30 different cellular subsets. The mixture was smeared on a slide and rendered by cycling staining with a “missing base” approach such that two subsets per staining cycle were co-visualized on different imaging channels.
  • Example 2 Antibody Signal Amplification In Situ with Rolling Circle Amplification Materials and Methods
  • Rat anti-mouse B220 antibody conjugate to oligonucleotide 146v2 was prepared as described. The conjugate were hybridized to a padlock oligonucleotide (PatgctaccgttAATTATTACTGAAACATACACTAAAGATAACATTA ttctgcaag; SEQ ID NO:125) that is designed to form a circular hybrid on 146v2. Mouse spleen cells were stained with either of the conjugates and then those cells that were stained with the padlock construct were incubated with T4 RNA ligase (NEB) in manufacturer's ligation buffer at 37 C for 1 hour and then with phi29 polymerase and dNTP mix for 15 minutes. Cells were washed 3 times with PBS and then incubated with 10 nM RCA product detection oligonucleotide (TGAAACATACACTAAAGA; SEQ ID NO:126) for 10 minutes. After that, cells were incubated with fluorescent dUTP-Cy5 (Jena Biosciences) was incorporated into the cells b incubating with 200 nM dUTP-Cy5 in buffer# 4 and 1 ul of exo− Klenow polymerase (Thermo Scientific). An aliquot of cells was left out and not subject to the rolling circle amplification (RCA) step and then used as a reference to assess the effect of RCA on staining.
  • Results
  • The efficiency of rolling circle amplification of multiplexing DNA barcode attached to the antibody for enhancing antibody staining was tested. A special antibody-DNA conjugate based on anti-B220 antibody that contained a circularized ‘padlock’ oligonucleotide annealed to the linker (146v2) oligonucleotide hybrid was assembled and mouse cells were stained with it. After staining, the padlock oligonucleotide was ligated with T4 ligase and amplified using the rolling circle protocol with phi29 polymerase, resulting in a long repetitive DNA stretch attached to each antibody that contained the repetitive sequence complementary to the detection primer. After annealing of the primer, multiple molecules of dUTP-Cy5 could be incorporated into the amplified DNA molecule, due to its repetitive nature. FIG. 16 panels A-E schematically illustrate this method. FIG. 16 panels F-G shows that the cells staining with the rolling circle amplification is much stronger than without it.
  • Example 3 Co-Detecting 22 Antigens on Dispersed Spleen Cells Materials and Methods
  • Antibody conjugates were prepared using the following protocol. Antibodies were subject to partial reduction of disulfide by 30 min incubation at room temperature with TCEP (final concentration 1 mM) in PBS pH 7.4. The antibodies were purified from TCEP by buffer exchange on BioGel P-30 spin-columns saturated with conjugation buffer (PBS pH 7.0). Oligonucleotide 146v2 (5′Maleimide-ATAGCAGTCCAGCCGAACGGTA GCATCTTGCAGAA; SEQ ID NO:127) bearing a protected maleimide group were ordered from Trilink Inc. To prepare for covalent crosslinking to antibodies per instruction from manufacturer the maleimide group residing on an oligonucleotide was de-protected/activated by Adler reaction (4 h at 90 C in toluene). Toluene was removed from the oligonucleotide by several washes in absolute ethanol. Activated oligonucleotides were dissolved in conjugation buffer and mixed with reduced antibodies at a molar ratio of 50:1. Sodium Chloride was added to conjugation reaction to final concentration of 1M. Conjugation reaction was allowed to proceed for 1 h. To remove the unbound oligonucleotide the conjugated antibodies were filtered 4 times on molecular weight cutoff filters (Amicon 50KDa). Final wash and storage were performed in phosphate buffer with 0.5M sodium chloride and 0.1% Tween-20.
  • To assemble DNA duplex tag 0.2 ug of conjugated antibodies was mixed with 100 pmoles of bottom strand oligonucleotide in phosphate buffer with 0.6M Sodium Chloride and incubated for 30 min at 40° C.
  • v2_C_cycle1 SEQ ID NO: 128:                 TTTTGTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_C_cycle2 SEQ ID NO: 129:                TTTTGtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_C_cycle3 SEQ ID NO: 130:               TTTTGCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_C_cycle4 SEQ ID NO: 131:              TTTTGTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_C_cycle5 SEQ ID NO: 132:            TTTTGCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_C_cycle6 SEQ ID NO: 133:         TTTTGtttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_C_cycle7 SEQ ID NO: 134:       TTTTGcctttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_C_cycle8 (SEQ ID NO: 135)     TTTTGttcctttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_C_cycle9 (SEQ ID NO: 136)    TTTTGcttcctttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_C_cycle10 (SEQ ID NO: 137)   TTTTGtcttcctttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_C_cycle11 (SEQ ID NO: 138) TTTTGcctcttcctttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_U_cycle1 SEQ ID NO: 139:                 TTTTATTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_U_cycle2 SEQ ID NO: 140:                TTTTAtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_U_cycle3 SEQ ID NO: 141:               TTTTACtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_U_cycle4 SEQ ID NO: 142:              TTTTATCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_U_cycle5 SEQ ID NO: 143:            TTTTACcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_U_cycle6 SEQ ID NO: 144:         TTTTAtttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_U_cycle7 SEQ ID NO: 145:       TTTTAcctttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_U_cycle8 (SEQ ID NO: 146)     TTTTAttcctttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_U_cycle9 (SEQ ID NO: 147)    TTTTActtcctttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_U_cycle10 (SEQ ID NO: 148)   TTTTAtcttcctttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
    v2_U_cycle11 (SEQ ID NO: 149) TTTTAcctcttcctttCcTCtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz
  • Mouse spleen and bone marrow cells were prepared according to standard procedure and fixed in 2% formaldehyde for 10 min at room temperature. Following fixation, cells were spun and either stored frozen at −80 in PBS with 5% DMSO or permeabilized by incubation in ice-cold methanol for 10 min. and further stored at −80° C. in methanol.
  • Before staining stored cells were washed with SM (0.5% BSA in PBS, 5mMEDTA) once and blocked for 30 min at room temperature in staining buffer (0.6M NaCl, 0.5% BSA, 50 ug/ml rat IgG, 200 ug/ml ssDNA, 5mMEDTA, 3 nmoles per ml of blocking oligonucleotide TTTTccctctcctcttcctttCcTCt-ddC in phosphate buffer pH 7.4). In case frozen sections were used—tissue sections were picked by warm coverslips and immediately placed into dry ice without allowing the section to dry. Coverslips with sections were dipped for 30 sec into ethanol pre-chilled to dry-ice temperature, and transferred to SME with 4% formaldehyde for 20 min. After that the fixed sections were washed twice in SM and further blocked in staining buffer for 30 min. Mouse spleen cells were stained in staining buffer for 2-3 h at room temperature with a mixture of conjugated antibodies taken at 0.2 ug of each antibody per 100 ul of solution. After staining cells were washed twice with SM05 (SM supplemented with NaCl up to 0.65M final concentration), then were allowed to adhere to poly-L-lysin coated coverslips and further fixed to coverslip surface by 20 min incubation with 5 mM BS3 crosslinker in PBS. Following methanol fixation/permeabilization cells were washed once with SM05, allowed to adhere to coverslip surface and further fixed to coverslip surface by 20 min incubation with 5 mM BS3 crosslinker in PBS. If frozen sections were used—following staining sections were washed twice by SM05 and fixed by 20 min incubation with 5 mM BS3 crosslinker in PBS. Following staining procedure and converting into planar form (in case of suspension cells) all kinds of samples were subjected to similar ABseq rendering protocol.
  • Coverslips with cells were washed twice with buffer 4 (10 mM Tris pH 6.5, 10 mM MgCl2, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton×100).
  • Staining was rendered by iterative incubation with polymerase reaction mixes. In odd cycles (1, 3, 5 . . . )—cells were incubated for 2 min in G-mix (150 nM dG, 150 nM dUssCy5, 150 nM dCssCy3, 25 ul NEB exo− Klenow per ml in buffer 4); wash 3 times with 405 (buffet 4 without MgCl and supplemented with NaCl up to final 0.65M); photographed; incubated 2 min in 50 mM TCEP in buffer 405; washed twice with 405; photographed; incubated for 1 min in freshly made 100 mM iodoacetamide in buffer 405; washed three times with buffer 4. In even cycles (2, 4, 6 . . . )—cells were incubated for 2 min in A—mix (150 nM dATP, 150 nM dUTPssCy5, 150 nM dCTPssCy3, 25 ul NEB exo− Klenow per ml in buffer 4); wash 3 times with 405 (buffet 4 without MgCl and supplemented with NaCl up to final 0.65M); photographed; incubated 4 min in 50 mM TCEP in buffer 405; washed twice with 405; photographed; incubated for 1 min in freshly made 100 mM iodoacetamide in buffer 405; washed three times with buffer #4. Reversibly labelled fluorescent nucleotide triphosphates were custom synthesized by Jena Bioscience.
  • Results
  • ABseq was used to explore the variety of cellular subsets in mouse spleen and bone marrow using 22-antibody panel. Isolated spleen and bone marrow cells were barcoded by whole cell staining with NHS-PacBlu and NHS-Ax-488 dyes, mixed, stained with a panel of 22 antibodies tagged with DNA duplexes, attached to slide and rendered by ABseq in 11 primer extension and imaging iterations (FIG. 17). Conspicuously 22-color marker expression data on pseudocolored image bearing all marker expressing data proved to be impossible to parse visually due to proximity of colors in multi-color palette (FIG. 17, bottom right panel).
  • Example 4 Multipanel Design with Spacers Materials and Methods
  • Antibody conjugation, cell staining and rendering was performed following the same experimental procedures as in section 4 (Co-detecting 22 antigens on dispersed spleen cells). Nine aliquots of spleen cells were stained separately with a different CD45 antibody-DNA conjugate. Conjugates for each panel were formed in the following way.
  • Panel1: CD45 conjugated to 146v2 (5′Maleimide-
    ATAGCAGTCCAGCCGAACGGTAGCATCTTGCAGAA (SEQ ID NO:
    174) and forming a DNA duplex with:
    (SEQ ID NO: 150)
    1. TTTTATTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGG-dideoxyC
    (SEQ ID NO: 151)
    2. TTTTAtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz-dideoxyC
    (SEQ ID NO: 152)
    3. TTTTACtTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGGz-dideoxyC
    Panel2 CD45 conjugated to 146v2-ddC(5′Maleimide-
    ATAGCAGTCCAGCCGAACGGTAGCATCTTGCAGAA-dideoxyC) (SEQ
    ID NO: 153) and forming a DNA duplex with:
    (SEQ ID NO: 154)
    4. TTTTAGCGATTAAGCGTGAACTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGG-
    dideoxyC
    (SEQ ID NO: 155)
    5. TTTTAtGCGATTAAGCGTGAACTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGG
    z-dideoxyC
    (SEQ ID NO: 156)
    6. TTTTACtGCGATTAAGCGTGAACTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCG
    Gz-dideoxyC 
    Panel3 CD45 conjugated to 146v2-ddC(5′Maleimide-
    ATAGCAGTCCAGCCGAACGGTAGCATCTTGCAGAA-dideoxyC) (SEQ
    ID NO: 157) and forming a DNA duplex with:
    (SEQ ID NO: 158)
    7. TTTTACGCTAATTCGCACTTGTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGG-
    dideoxyC
    (SEQ ID NO: 159)
    8. TTTTAtCGCTAATTCGCACTTGTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCGG
    z-dideoxyC 
    (SEQ ID NO: 160)
    9. TTTTACtCGCTAATTCGCACTTGTTCTGCAAGATGCTACCGTTCG
    Gz-dideoxyC 
  • After staining the cells were washed with washed twice with buffer 4 (10 mM Tris pH 6.5, 10 mM MgCl2, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton×100) to remove unbound antibody-DNA conjugates and then the aliquots of cells were mixed together and attached to a lysine-coated coverslip. Antigen staining was rendered in the following sequence of incubations: dGTP+dUTP-Cy5->dATP+dUTP-Cy5->dGTP+dUTP-Cy5->Incubation with luM spacer1 (GTTCACGCTTAATCGC; SEQ ID NO:161) in buffer#4 for 20 minutes->dGTP+dUTP-Cy5->dATP+dUTP-Cy5->dGTP+dUTP-Cy5->Incubation with luM spacer2 (CGCTAATTCGCACTTG; SEQ ID NO:162) in buffer#4 for 20 minutes->dGTP+dUTP-Cy5->dATP+dUTP-Cy5->dGTP+dUTP-Cy5. Imaging, fluorophore inactivation with 50 mM TCEP pH 7.0 and background blocking with iodoacetamide were performed after each step of rendering.
  • Results
  • Due to polymerase misincorporation errors the signal intensity of rendering by ABseq is expected to fall with increasing cycle numbers as observed in other studies on development of deep sequencing protocols utilizing sequential addition of individual nucleotides. To circumvent that and to avoid the use of extensively long DNA fragments linked to antibody the following amendment to the design was tested (FIG. 18, panel A). Large antibody panels can be split into subpanels such that the extension reaction on these subpanels is precluded by termination of the upper strand oligonucleotide with ddC, propyl or any other 3′ terminating group. After finishing the extension of each subpanel, the next subpanel is activated by in situ hybridization of a short “activation” spacer, which does not bear any terminating moiety on its 3′ end and thus initiates the consecutive cycles of primer extensions. This design was tested experimentally on 3 sequential 3-cycle panels (9 extension cycles in total) (FIG. 18, panel B). Image quantification showed no significant reduction of ABseq rendering efficiency associated with on-slide hybridization of panel activating spacer oligonucleotide was observed and no signal carryover between the individual panels (FIG. 18, panel C).
  • Example 5 Multiplexed Single Molecule RNA Detection Materials and Methods
  • NALM and Jurkat cell lines were grown to a density of 1 million/ml, fixed with 1.6% formaldehyde for 10 minutes and then transferred to ice-cold methanol. An aliquot of 200K cells was washed with PBSTR (PBS, 0.1% Tween-20 and 1:1000 Rnasin) and transferred to a hybridization buffer (1×SSC, 10% formamide, 10% vanadyl-ribonucleotide complex, 10% polyvinylsulfonic acid). DNA probe mixture was added to the final concentration of 100 nM and incubated at 40 C for 1 hour. Cells were washed 2 times with PBSTR at room temperature for 5 minutes and 2 times with a high salt buffer (4×SSC in PBSTR) at 40 degrees for 20 minutes, once again washed with PBSTR and transferred to a ligation solution (0.1 ul T4 DNA ligase (New England Biosciences), 5 ul 10× T4 ligase buffer (New England Biosciences), 45 ul H2O). Ligation proceeded for 1 h at 37 C. Then cells were transferred to amplification solution (1 ul of phi29 polymerase (Thermo Scientific), 5 ul of 10× polymerase buffer (Thermo Scientific), 1 ul of 10 mM dNTP mix, 43 ul of H2O) and incubated at 30 C for 1 h. Cells were washed with PBSTR and incubated with 1 mM “RCA detection” oligonucleotide for 10 minutes at 37 C and transferred to Sequencing buffer (10 mM Tris pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCl2, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton×100, 1:50 Klenow polymerase (Thermo Scientific), 200 mM dUTP-Cy5 (Jena Biosciences)). Cells were washed twice with high salt wash buffer (10 mM Tris pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCl2, 650 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton×100) and imaged using a florescent microscope.
  • HLA-DR padlock1
    (SEQ ID NO: 163)
    PACATTAaaatcctagcacagggactcAATTATTACTGAAACATACACTA
    AAGATApa
    HLA-DR splint-primer1
    (SEQ ID NO: 164)
    ctcatcagcacagctatgatgaTAATGTTATCTT
    HLA-DR padlock2
    (SEQ ID NO: 165)
    PACATTAtagaactcggcctggatgatAATTATTACTGAAACATACACTA
    AAGATA
    HLA-DR splint-primer2
    (SEQ ID NO: 166)
    ctgattggtcaggattcagaTAATGTTATCTT
    HLA-DR padlock3
    (SEQ ID NO: 167)
    PACATTAtcaaagctggcaaatcgtccAATTATTACTGAAACATACACTA
    AAGATA
    HLA-DR splint-primer2
    (SEQ ID NO: 168)
    tggccaatgcaccttgagccTAATGTTATCTT
    HLA-DR padlock4
    (SEQ ID NO: 169)
    PACATTAtgatttccaggttggctttgAATTATTACTGAAACATACACTA
    AAGATA
    HLA-DR splint-primer2
    (SEQ ID NO: 170)
    atagttggagcgctttgtcaTAATGTTATCTT
    HLA-DR padlock5
    (SEQ ID NO: 171)
    PACATTAtttcgaagccacgtgacattAATTATTACTGAAACATACACTA
    AAGATA
    HLA-DR splint-primer2
    (SEQ ID NO: 172)
    ctgtggtgacaggttttccaTAATGTTATCTT
    RCA detect
    (SEQ ID NO: 173)
    CATACACTAAAGATAACAT
  • Results
  • An on-slide primer extension protocol was applied to detect single molecules of human HLADRA mRNA in NALM pro-B-cell line. Jurkat T-cell lymphoma line was used as a negative control to assess the background. In order to enable single molecule mRNA detection, a signal amplification system was designed based on proximity ligation and rolling circle amplification (RCA). Five pairs of probes were designed in a way that the two oligos of each pair were complementary to directly adjacent 20-nt stretches of HLADRA mRNA and that the 3′ region of the upstream oligonucleotide served as a splint for circularization of the downstream padlock oligonucleotide (FIG. 19, A) and also as a primer for the rolling circle amplification. After the complex assembly the cells were washed and treated with T4 DNA ligase to circularize the padlock oligonucleotide and the incubated with phi29 polymerase and dNTP mix to carry out the rolling circle amplification (FIG. 19, B). Amplification products were incubated with “RCA detect” oligonucleotide (FIG. 19, C) and then fluorescent dUTP-Cy5 was incorporated by a single base extension with Klenow polymerase (FIG. 19, D). Cells were washed and imaged with a fluorescent microscope. Images of NALM cells that express HLADR show abundant punctate staining in the cytoplasm that corresponds to the RCA products (FIG. 19, E) and the Jurkat cells that are negative for HLADR show very few puncta (FIG. 19, F), demonstrating the high specificity of the proximity ligation-based detection of HLADRA mRNA.

Claims (36)

What is claimed is:
1. A method for analyzing a planar sample, the method comprising:
(a) labeling the planar sample with a capture agent to produce a labeled sample, wherein:
(i) the capture agent is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand; and
(ii) a 3′ end or 5′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template;
(b) contacting the labeled sample with i. a polymerase and a plurality of nucleotides and/or ii. a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase, thereby adding one or more nucleotides of the plurality of nucleotides and/or a labeled oligonucleotide to an end of one of the strands of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and
(c) reading a signal generated by addition of the one or more nucleotides and/or labeled oligonucleotide to one of the first strand or the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the signal is a fluorescent signal.
3. The method of claim 2, wherein reading comprises flourescence microscopy.
4. The method of any prior claim, further comprising producing an image showing the pattern of binding of the capture agent to the planar sample.
5. The method of any prior claim, wherein:
step (b) comprises contacting the labeled sample with a polymerase and a plurality of nucleotides that comprises a fluorescent nucleotide, thereby adding the fluorescent nucleotide to one of the first strand or the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and
step (c) comprises reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotide to one of the first strand or the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid.
6. The method of claim 5, wherein the fluorescent signal is: i. emitted directly from the added nucleotide; ii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two fluorescent nucleotides of the plurality of flourescent nucleotides that are added to one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid; or iii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between the added fluorescent nucleotide and a second fluorescent nucleotide that is present in one of the first strand or second strand double-stranded nucleic acid.
7. The method of any of claims 1-4, wherein:
step (b) comprises contacting the labeled sample with a ligase and a labeled oligonucleotide, thereby adding the labeled oligonucleotide to one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid; and
step (c) comprises reading a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the labeled oligonucleotide to one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid.
8. The method of claim 7, wherein the fluorescent signal is: i. emitted directly from the added labeled nucleotide; ii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between two labeled nucleotides that are added to one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid; or iii. a FRET signal generated by energy transfer between the labeled nucleotide added to one of the first strand and second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid and a second labeled nucleotide that is present in the other strand.
9. The method of claim 8, wherein the labeled nucleotide comprises a fluorescent nucleotide.
10. The method of claim 1, wherein extension of one of the first strand or second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid removes a quencher from a quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the other strand, downstream from the first strand.
11. The method of any of claims 1-10, wherein the first strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid is a rolling circle amplification (RCA) product, and the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid comprises oligonucleotides that are hybridized to multiple sites in the RCA product.
12. The method of any of claims 1-10, wherein the first strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid is a first oligonucleotide, and the second strand of the double-stranded nucleic acid is a second oligonucleotide that is hybridized to the first oligonucleotide.
13. The method of any of claims 1-12, wherein the planar sample is a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded (FFPE) section.
14. The method of claim 1, wherein the capture agent is an antibody, an aptamer, or an oligonucleotide probe.
15. A capture agent that is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid, wherein:
(i) the double-stranded nucleic acid comprises a first strand and a second strand;
(ii) the capture agent is linked to the first strand; and
(iii) the 5′ end or the 3′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template.
16. A capture agent composition comprising a plurality of capture agents that each recognize different complementary sites, wherein:
each of the plurality of capture agents is linked to a double-stranded nucleic acid that comprises a first strand and a second strand;
the 5′ end or 3′ end of the first or second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template; and
the templates immediately downstream of the extendible ends are different for each of the plurality of capture agents.
17. The capture agent composition of claim 16, wherein:
the sequence of the first strand is the same for each of the plurality of capture agents; and
the sequence of the second strand is different for each of the plurality of capture agents.
18. The composition of claim 16, wherein the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ ends are of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more.
19. The composition of claim 16, wherein the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ ends are of the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by a short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of N3 and N4, and wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
20. A method for analyzing a planar sample comprising:
(a) labeling the planar sample with a capture agent composition of any of claims 16-19;
(b) contacting the labeled sample with i. a polymerase and either an incomplete nucleotide mix or a nucleotide mix that comprises a reversible terminator nucleotide, thereby adding a nucleotide to the plurality of capture agents; and/or ii. a labeled oligonucleotide and a ligase, thereby adding a labeled oligonucleotide to the plurality of capture agents; and
(c) reading a signal generated by addition of the nucleotide or the labeled oligonucleotide to some but not all of the plurality of capture agents.
21. The method of claim 20, wherein the signal comprises a fluorescent signal.
22. The method of claim 21, wherein the reading comprises fluorescent microscopy.
23. The method of claim 20, comprising:
(b) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and: (i) a nucleotide mix that comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4; or (ii) a nucleotide mix that comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, and N2, an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N3, and no nucleotide that is complementary to N4, thereby adding fluorescent nucleotides onto the double-stranded nucleic acids of some but not all of the plurality of capture agents; and
(c) reading, using fluorescence microscopy, a fluorescent signal generated by addition of the fluorescent nucleotides to the double-stranded nucleic acids of some but not all of the plurality of capture agents.
24. The method of claim 23, wherein the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end are of the formula 3′-N4nN1/N2/N3, wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C and n is 1 or more; and step (b) comprises contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and a nucleotide mix that comprises a plurality of fluorescent nucleotides that are complementary to N1, N2 and N3 and a reversible terminator nucleotide that is complementary to N4.
25. The method of claim 23, further comprising:
(d) inactivating the fluorescent signal,
(e) optionally, deprotecting the reversible terminator nucleotide;
(f) blocking the sample; and
(g) repeating steps (b) and (c).
26. The method of claim 25, wherein step (g) comprises repeating steps (b)-(f) multiple times.
27. The method of claim 23, wherein the templates immediately adjacent to the extendible 3′ end are of the formula 3′-YN1/N2-5′, optionally followed by a short stretch of random nucleotides on the 5′ end to increase the overall polymerase residence on the DNA duplex, wherein Y is composed of alternating stretches of N3 and N4, and wherein N1, N2, N3 and N4 are different nucleotides selected from G, A, T and C.
28. The method of claim 27, further comprising:
(d) inactivating the fluorescent signal;
(e) contacting the planar sample with a polymerase and an unlabeled nucleotide that is complementary to N4; and
(f) repeating steps (b) and (c).
29. The method of claim 28, wherein step (f) comprises repeating steps (b)-(e) multiple times.
30. The method of claim 20, wherein the double-stranded nucleic acids each comprise a fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide hybridized to the second strand downstream from the first strand, wherein the fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide comprises a quencher and extension of the first strand removes the quencher from some but not all of the quenched fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides, thereby generating a fluorescent signal for some but not all of the plurality of capture agents.
31. The method of claim 20, wherein extension of the double-stranded nucleic acid comprises contacting the planar sample with a mixture of labeled and unlabeled oligonucleotides and a ligase.
32. The method of claim 20, wherein the plurality of capture agents are selected from the group consisting of: antibodies, aptamers, and oligonucleotide probes.
33. A kit comprising:
(a) one or more capture agents, wherein the one or more capture agents can specifically bind to complementary sites in a planar sample.
(b) one or more double-stranded nucleic acids comprising a first strand a second strand,
wherein each of the one or more capture agents is linked to the double-stranded nucleic acid, and wherein a 5′ end or 3′ end of either the first strand or the second strand is extendible using the other strand as a template.
34. The kit of claim 33, further comprising a polymerase.
35. The kit of claim 34, further comprising a nucleotide mix comprising at least one of a fluorescent nucleotide, an unlabeled nucleotide, and a reversible terminator nucleotide.
36. The kit of claim 33, wherein the one or more capture agents is selected from the group consisting of: an antibody, an aptamer and an oligonucleotide probe.
US15/317,019 2014-06-23 2015-06-19 On-slide staining by primer extension Abandoned US20170107563A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US15/317,019 US20170107563A1 (en) 2014-06-23 2015-06-19 On-slide staining by primer extension
US16/679,769 US10982263B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2019-11-11 On-slide staining by primer extension

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201462015799P 2014-06-23 2014-06-23
US14/560,921 US9909167B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2014-12-04 On-slide staining by primer extension
US15/317,019 US20170107563A1 (en) 2014-06-23 2015-06-19 On-slide staining by primer extension
PCT/US2015/036763 WO2015200139A1 (en) 2014-06-23 2015-06-19 On-slide staining by primer extension

Related Parent Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/560,921 Continuation-In-Part US9909167B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2014-12-04 On-slide staining by primer extension
US14/560,921 Continuation US9909167B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2014-12-04 On-slide staining by primer extension
PCT/US2015/036763 A-371-Of-International WO2015200139A1 (en) 2014-06-23 2015-06-19 On-slide staining by primer extension

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/679,769 Continuation US10982263B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2019-11-11 On-slide staining by primer extension

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20170107563A1 true US20170107563A1 (en) 2017-04-20

Family

ID=54869107

Family Applications (10)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/560,921 Active 2036-02-24 US9909167B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2014-12-04 On-slide staining by primer extension
US15/317,019 Abandoned US20170107563A1 (en) 2014-06-23 2015-06-19 On-slide staining by primer extension
US15/832,621 Active US10000796B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2017-12-05 On-slide staining by primer extension
US15/832,627 Active US10006082B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2017-12-05 On-slide straining by primer extension
US15/832,595 Active US10017808B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2017-12-05 On-slide staining by primer extension
US16/240,463 Active 2036-08-04 US11299770B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2019-01-04 On-slide staining by primer extension
US16/679,769 Active US10982263B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2019-11-11 On-slide staining by primer extension
US17/185,757 Active 2034-12-25 US11634753B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2021-02-25 On-slide staining by primer extension
US17/672,552 Active US11926865B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2022-02-15 On-slide staining by primer extension
US18/177,750 Pending US20240035068A1 (en) 2014-06-23 2023-03-02 On-slide staining by primer extension

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/560,921 Active 2036-02-24 US9909167B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2014-12-04 On-slide staining by primer extension

Family Applications After (8)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/832,621 Active US10000796B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2017-12-05 On-slide staining by primer extension
US15/832,627 Active US10006082B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2017-12-05 On-slide straining by primer extension
US15/832,595 Active US10017808B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2017-12-05 On-slide staining by primer extension
US16/240,463 Active 2036-08-04 US11299770B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2019-01-04 On-slide staining by primer extension
US16/679,769 Active US10982263B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2019-11-11 On-slide staining by primer extension
US17/185,757 Active 2034-12-25 US11634753B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2021-02-25 On-slide staining by primer extension
US17/672,552 Active US11926865B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2022-02-15 On-slide staining by primer extension
US18/177,750 Pending US20240035068A1 (en) 2014-06-23 2023-03-02 On-slide staining by primer extension

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (10) US9909167B2 (en)
EP (2) EP3158089B1 (en)
JP (2) JP6910145B2 (en)
CN (2) CN106574301B (en)
AU (2) AU2015280326B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2952872A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2015200139A1 (en)

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020092835A1 (en) * 2018-10-31 2020-05-07 Akoya Biosciences, Inc. Methods and kits for detecting cells using oligonucleotide conjugated antibodies
US10781477B2 (en) 2016-12-16 2020-09-22 Aratome, LLC Molecular detection using ligation amplification
US10871485B2 (en) 2018-04-13 2020-12-22 Rarecyte, Inc. Kits for labeling of biomarkers and methods of using the same
US11174516B2 (en) 2012-02-09 2021-11-16 The Hospital For Sick Children Methods and compositions for screening and treating developmental disorders
US11180807B2 (en) 2011-11-04 2021-11-23 Population Bio, Inc. Methods for detecting a genetic variation in attractin-like 1 (ATRNL1) gene in subject with Parkinson's disease
US11384397B2 (en) 2013-11-12 2022-07-12 Population Bio, Inc. Methods and compositions for diagnosing, prognosing, and treating endometriosis
US11492662B2 (en) * 2020-08-06 2022-11-08 Singular Genomics Systems, Inc. Methods for in situ transcriptomics and proteomics

Families Citing this family (42)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11021737B2 (en) 2011-12-22 2021-06-01 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions and methods for analyte detection
WO2014210225A1 (en) 2013-06-25 2014-12-31 Prognosys Biosciences, Inc. Methods and systems for determining spatial patterns of biological targets in a sample
US9909167B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2018-03-06 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University On-slide staining by primer extension
EP3901281B1 (en) 2015-04-10 2022-11-23 Spatial Transcriptomics AB Spatially distinguished, multiplex nucleic acid analysis of biological specimens
US10501777B2 (en) 2015-07-17 2019-12-10 Nanostring Technologies, Inc. Simultaneous quantification of a plurality of proteins in a user-defined region of a cross-sectioned tissue
CA2992492A1 (en) 2015-07-17 2017-01-26 Nanostring Technologies, Inc. Simultaneous quantification of gene expression in a user-defined region of a cross-sectioned tissue
US11008608B2 (en) 2016-02-26 2021-05-18 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Multiplexed single molecule RNA visualization with a two-probe proximity ligation system
CA3210120C (en) 2016-04-25 2024-04-09 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Hybridization chain reaction methods for in situ molecular detection
EP3460474B1 (en) * 2016-05-19 2022-04-06 Toppan Printing Co., Ltd. Method and kit for target molecule detection
EP4050112A1 (en) 2016-06-21 2022-08-31 10X Genomics, Inc. Nucleic acid sequencing
CN116064727A (en) 2016-07-27 2023-05-05 斯坦福大学托管董事会 Highly multiplexed fluorescence imaging
CN111263819A (en) 2017-10-06 2020-06-09 卡特阿纳公司 RNA templated ligation
JP2021511799A (en) * 2018-01-30 2021-05-13 ラッシュ ユニヴァーシティ メディカル センター Continuous staining for multiple analysis of tissues and cells
CN112154216A (en) 2018-02-12 2020-12-29 纳米线科技公司 Biomolecule probes and methods for detecting gene and protein expression
EP3867406B1 (en) 2018-10-19 2023-01-04 Akoya Biosciences, Inc. Detection of co-occurring receptor-coding nucleic acid segments
WO2020123319A2 (en) 2018-12-10 2020-06-18 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods of using master / copy arrays for spatial detection
CN113287014A (en) * 2018-12-27 2021-08-20 生物辐射实验室股份有限公司 Sequential multiplex western blot
US11926867B2 (en) 2019-01-06 2024-03-12 10X Genomics, Inc. Generating capture probes for spatial analysis
US11649485B2 (en) 2019-01-06 2023-05-16 10X Genomics, Inc. Generating capture probes for spatial analysis
EP3976817A1 (en) 2019-05-31 2022-04-06 10X Genomics, Inc. Method of detecting target nucleic acid molecules
EP4022082A1 (en) 2019-09-30 2022-07-06 Akoya Biosciences, Inc. Multiplexed imaging with enzyme mediated amplification
EP4025711A2 (en) 2019-11-08 2022-07-13 10X Genomics, Inc. Enhancing specificity of analyte binding
SG11202106899SA (en) 2019-12-23 2021-09-29 10X Genomics Inc Methods for spatial analysis using rna-templated ligation
US11732299B2 (en) 2020-01-21 2023-08-22 10X Genomics, Inc. Spatial assays with perturbed cells
US11702693B2 (en) 2020-01-21 2023-07-18 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods for printing cells and generating arrays of barcoded cells
US11898205B2 (en) 2020-02-03 2024-02-13 10X Genomics, Inc. Increasing capture efficiency of spatial assays
US11732300B2 (en) 2020-02-05 2023-08-22 10X Genomics, Inc. Increasing efficiency of spatial analysis in a biological sample
US11891654B2 (en) 2020-02-24 2024-02-06 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods of making gene expression libraries
WO2021216708A1 (en) 2020-04-22 2021-10-28 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods for spatial analysis using targeted rna depletion
WO2021237087A1 (en) 2020-05-22 2021-11-25 10X Genomics, Inc. Spatial analysis to detect sequence variants
EP4153775A1 (en) 2020-05-22 2023-03-29 10X Genomics, Inc. Simultaneous spatio-temporal measurement of gene expression and cellular activity
EP4162074B1 (en) 2020-06-08 2024-04-24 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods of determining a surgical margin and methods of use thereof
CN116034166A (en) 2020-06-25 2023-04-28 10X基因组学有限公司 Spatial analysis of DNA methylation
US11761038B1 (en) 2020-07-06 2023-09-19 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods for identifying a location of an RNA in a biological sample
JP2023534988A (en) 2020-07-20 2023-08-15 アコヤ・バイオサイエンシズ・インコーポレイテッド Tissue sample processing and imaging
US11926822B1 (en) 2020-09-23 2024-03-12 10X Genomics, Inc. Three-dimensional spatial analysis
US20220155311A1 (en) 2020-11-18 2022-05-19 Akoya Biosciences, Inc. Multiplexed Imaging with Nanobody Probes
US11827935B1 (en) 2020-11-19 2023-11-28 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods for spatial analysis using rolling circle amplification and detection probes
AU2021409136A1 (en) 2020-12-21 2023-06-29 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods, compositions, and systems for capturing probes and/or barcodes
CN113024665A (en) * 2021-05-31 2021-06-25 泛肽生物科技(浙江)有限公司 Method for labeling antibodies by oligos and antibodies obtained by labeling antibodies
WO2023034489A1 (en) 2021-09-01 2023-03-09 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods, compositions, and kits for blocking a capture probe on a spatial array
WO2024020122A1 (en) * 2022-07-20 2024-01-25 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Method for highly multiplexed, thermal controllable dna extension and its applications

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20020072053A1 (en) * 2000-12-08 2002-06-13 Mcnally Alan J. Immunoassay based on DNA replication using labeled primer
US20040091857A1 (en) * 2001-07-20 2004-05-13 Nallur Girish N. Gene expression profiling
US20040185453A1 (en) * 2003-03-21 2004-09-23 Joel Myerson Affinity based methods for separating homologous parental genetic material and uses thereof
US20050009050A1 (en) * 2003-04-18 2005-01-13 James Nadeau Immuno-amplification
US20130059741A1 (en) * 2010-05-13 2013-03-07 Illumina, Inc. Binding assays for markers
US20140030721A1 (en) * 2011-01-31 2014-01-30 Olink Ab Exonuclease Enabled Proximity Extension Assays
US20140194311A1 (en) * 2011-05-24 2014-07-10 Olink Ab Multiplexed Proximity Ligation Assay
US20150111788A1 (en) * 2011-11-22 2015-04-23 Active Motif Multiplex isolation of protein-associated nucleic acids
US20160115474A1 (en) * 2011-11-22 2016-04-28 Active Motif, Inc. Targeted transposition for use in epigenetic studies

Family Cites Families (109)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US1000796A (en) 1910-11-08 1911-08-15 Jacob Whitfield Graham Spring-tire.
US5063151A (en) * 1985-09-20 1991-11-05 Biometallics, Inc. Immunoassay method and kit
US5068178A (en) * 1988-12-06 1991-11-26 Genetic Systems Corporation Method of enhancing direct immunofluorescence staining of cells
US5491224A (en) 1990-09-20 1996-02-13 Bittner; Michael L. Direct label transaminated DNA probe compositions for chromosome identification and methods for their manufacture
ATE185378T1 (en) * 1992-02-04 1999-10-15 Nen Life Science Prod Inc AMPLIFICATION OF TEST REPORTERS BY NUCLEIC ACID REPLICATION
US5985548A (en) * 1993-02-04 1999-11-16 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Amplification of assay reporters by nucleic acid replication
US5854033A (en) 1995-11-21 1998-12-29 Yale University Rolling circle replication reporter systems
US6027890A (en) 1996-01-23 2000-02-22 Rapigene, Inc. Methods and compositions for enhancing sensitivity in the analysis of biological-based assays
US6117631A (en) * 1996-10-29 2000-09-12 Polyprobe, Inc. Detection of antigens via oligonucleotide antibody conjugates
US20100081134A1 (en) 1997-07-21 2010-04-01 Mirkin Chad A Bio-barcode based detection of target analytes
US5948902A (en) 1997-11-20 1999-09-07 South Alabama Medical Science Foundation Antisense oligonucleotides to human serine/threonine protein phosphatase genes
WO1999050460A1 (en) 1998-03-31 1999-10-07 Tularik, Inc. HIGH THROUGHPUT ASSAY FOR DETECTION OF mRNA IN CELLS
US8131053B2 (en) 1999-01-25 2012-03-06 Amnis Corporation Detection of circulating tumor cells using imaging flow cytometry
US6316230B1 (en) 1999-08-13 2001-11-13 Applera Corporation Polymerase extension at 3′ terminus of PNA-DNA chimera
US6998239B1 (en) * 1999-10-12 2006-02-14 Chemocentryx, Inc. Method for identifying a modulator of the binding of CCX CKR polypeptide to a chemokine
EP1280466A1 (en) 2000-05-11 2003-02-05 SYNTHES AG Chur Push-connection for the detachable connection of two bodies, in particular a pedicle screw and a screwdriver
US6511809B2 (en) * 2000-06-13 2003-01-28 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Method for the detection of an analyte by means of a nucleic acid reporter
US6790636B1 (en) 2000-06-14 2004-09-14 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Rapid fluorescent labeling of tissue for microdissection using fluorescent specific binding agents
US6531283B1 (en) * 2000-06-20 2003-03-11 Molecular Staging, Inc. Protein expression profiling
US6743592B1 (en) 2000-07-25 2004-06-01 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Methods, systems and kits for immuno-detection of epitopes expressed on molecules
US20040038194A1 (en) 2000-10-06 2004-02-26 Hofmann Scott Daniel Diagnostic polymerase chain reaction process utilizing simultaneous capture and detection of amplicons
EP1377828A4 (en) 2001-04-10 2006-11-15 Childrens Medical Center Methods of analysis and labeling of protein-protein interactions
EP1270738A1 (en) 2001-06-18 2003-01-02 chimera biotec GmbH Method for detecting substances in liquids
US20020197694A1 (en) 2001-06-20 2002-12-26 Weiping Shao Conjugates of reduced antibodies and biomolecules
US7341831B2 (en) 2001-07-18 2008-03-11 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Method for immuno-detection of epitopes
US6658780B2 (en) 2001-09-06 2003-12-09 Aris Papadimas Revolver device
JP3926178B2 (en) * 2001-11-02 2007-06-06 富士通株式会社 Protein detection device
US20060046249A1 (en) * 2002-01-18 2006-03-02 Fei Huang Identification of polynucleotides and polypetide for predicting activity of compounds that interact with protein tyrosine kinase and or protein tyrosine kinase pathways
CA2480525A1 (en) 2002-03-29 2003-10-09 Nugen Technologies, Inc. Single primer isothermal nucleic acid amplification-enhanced analyte detection and quantification
US8399196B2 (en) * 2003-02-21 2013-03-19 Geneform Technologies Limited Nucleic acid sequencing methods, kits and reagents
US7198900B2 (en) 2003-08-29 2007-04-03 Applera Corporation Multiplex detection compositions, methods, and kits
US7341837B2 (en) * 2003-09-02 2008-03-11 Lawton Robert L Soluble analyte detection and amplification
WO2005054514A1 (en) * 2003-12-02 2005-06-16 Agency For Science, Technology And Research Immuno-amplification rna assay
KR100695123B1 (en) 2003-12-03 2007-03-14 삼성전자주식회사 Polynucleotide microarray comprising 2 or more groups of probe polynucleotide immobilized on a substrate in accordance with Tm and method for detecting a target polynucleotide
US20050233340A1 (en) 2004-04-20 2005-10-20 Barrett Michael T Methods and compositions for assessing CpG methylation
ATE480643T1 (en) 2004-11-03 2010-09-15 Iris Molecular Diagnostics Inc HOMOGENEOUS DETECTION OF ANALYTES
JP2008532003A (en) 2005-02-25 2008-08-14 コミツサリア タ レネルジー アトミーク Method and device for separating molecular targets in complex mixtures
US20070020650A1 (en) * 2005-04-01 2007-01-25 Avak Kahvejian Methods for detecting proteins
WO2006128010A2 (en) 2005-05-26 2006-11-30 The Trustees Of Boston University Quantification of nucleic acids and proteins using oligonucleotide mass tags
WO2007005649A2 (en) 2005-06-30 2007-01-11 Applera Corporation Proximity probing of target proteins comprising restriction and/or extension field
US8530196B2 (en) 2006-04-07 2013-09-10 The Trustees Of The Univeristy Of Pennsylvania In situ cloning from pathological tissue specimens
WO2008005673A2 (en) 2006-06-30 2008-01-10 Applera Corporation Reversible terminator nucleotides and methods of use
WO2008052774A2 (en) 2006-10-31 2008-05-08 Noxxon Pharma Ag Methods for detection of a single- or double-stranded nucleic acid molecule
US9201063B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2015-12-01 General Electric Company Sequential analysis of biological samples
US8305579B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2012-11-06 Thomas Pirrie Treynor Sequential analysis of biological samples
SE531135C2 (en) 2006-12-01 2008-12-23 Alf Maansson Sensitive detection of toxins, pathogens and disease markers by aggregation of cytoskeletal filaments
WO2008076375A2 (en) 2006-12-13 2008-06-26 Autogenomics, Inc. Concurrent analysis of multiple patient samples using solid phase addressable multiplex test with high signal-to-noise ratio
CN101210270A (en) 2006-12-31 2008-07-02 陕西北美基因股份有限公司 High-flux fast detecting method for virus pathogen
GB0703996D0 (en) * 2007-03-01 2007-04-11 Oxitec Ltd Nucleic acid detection
US8003314B2 (en) 2007-04-16 2011-08-23 Diagnostic Hybrids, Inc. Methods for direct fluorescent antibody virus detection in liquids
JP2010533867A (en) * 2007-07-17 2010-10-28 アジレント テクノロジーズ インコーポレイテッド Analyte detection assay
US8088715B2 (en) 2007-11-13 2012-01-03 Ikonisys, Inc. Detection of circulating tumor cells in peripheral blood with an automated scanning fluorescence microscope
WO2009126678A2 (en) 2008-04-08 2009-10-15 Cornell University Detection of target nucleic acid sequences using fluorescence resonance energy transfer
US20100021904A1 (en) 2008-05-21 2010-01-28 Pierce Niles A Shielded cross-linking probes
US8530156B2 (en) 2008-08-08 2013-09-10 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Chemically cleavable phosphoramidite linkers for sequencing by ligation
WO2010019446A1 (en) 2008-08-09 2010-02-18 University Of Iowa Research Foundation Nucleic acid aptamers
US8262879B2 (en) 2008-09-03 2012-09-11 Nabsys, Inc. Devices and methods for determining the length of biopolymers and distances between probes bound thereto
US9156010B2 (en) 2008-09-23 2015-10-13 Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc. Droplet-based assay system
US8309306B2 (en) 2008-11-12 2012-11-13 Nodality, Inc. Detection composition
EP2703816B1 (en) 2008-11-21 2016-10-05 Saint Louis University Biosensor for detecting multiple epitopes on a target
DE102008062372B3 (en) 2008-12-17 2010-06-17 Medizinische Hochschule Hannover Detecting conjugate and method of analysis
US8753824B2 (en) 2009-04-03 2014-06-17 University Of Virginia Patent Foundation Serial multiple antigen colocalization in paraffin-embedded tissue
US9284559B2 (en) 2009-04-14 2016-03-15 Wake Forest University Health Sciences Multivalent aptamer complexes
EP2430033A4 (en) 2009-05-05 2012-11-07 Altermune Technologies Llc Chemically programmable immunity
US9677125B2 (en) 2009-10-21 2017-06-13 General Electric Company Detection of plurality of targets in biological samples
US8658780B2 (en) 2010-05-18 2014-02-25 California Institute Of Technology Triggered covalent probes for imaging and silencing genetic expression
US20120004132A1 (en) 2010-07-02 2012-01-05 Affymetrix, Inc. Detection of Nucleic Acids and Proteins
US20130225420A1 (en) 2010-08-02 2013-08-29 The Regents Of The University Of California Molecular subtyping of oral squamous cell carcinoma to distinguish a subtype that is unlikely to metastasize
US20120034603A1 (en) 2010-08-06 2012-02-09 Tandem Diagnostics, Inc. Ligation-based detection of genetic variants
EP2633081B1 (en) 2010-10-29 2017-01-11 Olink Bioscience AB Proximity ligation technology for western blot applications
WO2012058638A2 (en) 2010-10-29 2012-05-03 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Nucleic acid nanostructure barcode probes
CN103429331B (en) 2010-11-01 2016-09-28 伯乐生命医学产品有限公司 For forming the system of emulsion
US20120258870A1 (en) 2010-11-22 2012-10-11 The University Of Chicago Methods, Systems, and/or Use of Oligonucleotide Conjugates to Develop Panels for Use in Assays and Detections
US20120178081A1 (en) 2010-12-31 2012-07-12 Affymetrix. Inc. Methods of Labeling Cells, Labeled Cells, and uses Thereof
DK2665833T3 (en) * 2011-01-17 2017-07-24 Life Technologies Corp WORKING PROCEDURE FOR DETECTING LIGANDS USING NUCLEIC ACIDS
US20120252682A1 (en) 2011-04-01 2012-10-04 Maples Corporate Services Limited Methods and systems for sequencing nucleic acids
US8946389B2 (en) 2011-04-25 2015-02-03 University Of Washington Compositions and methods for multiplex biomarker profiling
GB201107863D0 (en) 2011-05-11 2011-06-22 Olink Ab Method and product
CA2859761C (en) * 2011-12-22 2023-06-20 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions and methods for analyte detection
GB201201547D0 (en) 2012-01-30 2012-03-14 Olink Ab Method and product
US9267168B2 (en) 2012-06-12 2016-02-23 Pacific Biosciences Of California, Inc. Methods and compositions for isolating template nucleic acids
US9663818B2 (en) 2012-06-15 2017-05-30 The University Of Chicago Oligonucleotide-mediated quantitative multiplexed immunoassays
US9707562B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2017-07-18 Denovo Sciences, Inc. System for capturing and analyzing cells
WO2014152625A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-25 Genapsys, Inc. Systems and methods for biological analysis
WO2014182283A1 (en) 2013-05-07 2014-11-13 Empire Technology Development Llc Terahertz frequency tags and methods for their preparation and use
AU2014278537B2 (en) 2013-06-12 2018-04-19 The General Hospital Corporation Methods, kits, and systems for multiplexed detection of target molecules and uses thereof
WO2015017586A1 (en) 2013-07-30 2015-02-05 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Quantitative dna-based imaging and super-resolution imaging
US9193359B2 (en) 2013-08-12 2015-11-24 GM Global Technology Operations LLC Vehicle systems and methods for identifying a driver
WO2015052287A1 (en) 2013-10-11 2015-04-16 Ventana Medical Systems, Inc. Multiplex her2 and estrogen receptor co-staining assays for detecting tumor heterogeneity
US9834814B2 (en) 2013-11-22 2017-12-05 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Spatial molecular barcoding of in situ nucleic acids
GB201401885D0 (en) 2014-02-04 2014-03-19 Olink Ab Proximity assay with detection based on hybridisation chain reaction (HCR)
EP4245859A3 (en) 2014-03-11 2023-11-08 President and Fellows of Harvard College High-throughput and highly multiplexed imaging with programmable nucleic acid probes
US9753036B2 (en) * 2014-04-29 2017-09-05 Edp Biotech Corporation Methods and compositions for screening and detecting biomarkers
WO2015191666A2 (en) 2014-06-10 2015-12-17 Blueprint Medicines Corporation Raf1 fusions
WO2015188839A2 (en) 2014-06-13 2015-12-17 Immudex Aps General detection and isolation of specific cells by binding of labeled molecules
US9909167B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2018-03-06 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University On-slide staining by primer extension
SG11201700207WA (en) 2014-07-11 2017-02-27 Genentech Inc Anti-pd-l1 antibodies and diagnostic uses thereof
US9625387B2 (en) 2014-09-16 2017-04-18 Lawrence Livermore National Security, Llc System and method for controlling depth of imaging in tissues using fluorescence microscopy under ultraviolet excitation following staining with fluorescing agents
US10071121B2 (en) 2014-11-14 2018-09-11 San Diego State University (Sdsu) Foundation Cardiac, mesenchymal and endothelial progenitor cell (CPC) chimeras and methods for making and using them
WO2016085659A1 (en) 2014-11-24 2016-06-02 Battelle Memorial Institute Chromatin activity precipitation method and system
US10006917B2 (en) 2014-12-15 2018-06-26 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Methods and compositions relating to super-resolution imaging and modification
US20180095067A1 (en) 2015-04-03 2018-04-05 Abbott Laboratories Devices and methods for sample analysis
CN107636169A (en) 2015-04-17 2018-01-26 生捷科技控股公司 The method that profile space analysis is carried out to biomolecule
CA2992492A1 (en) 2015-07-17 2017-01-26 Nanostring Technologies, Inc. Simultaneous quantification of gene expression in a user-defined region of a cross-sectioned tissue
US20180224461A1 (en) 2015-08-07 2018-08-09 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Super resolution imaging of protein-protein interactions
WO2017200870A1 (en) 2016-05-15 2017-11-23 Ultivue, Inc. Multiplexed imaging using strand displacement
US20170349949A1 (en) 2016-06-03 2017-12-07 Partikula Llc Methods of selecting subjects for treatment with metabolic modulators
CN116064727A (en) 2016-07-27 2023-05-05 斯坦福大学托管董事会 Highly multiplexed fluorescence imaging
US11099170B2 (en) 2018-06-13 2021-08-24 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois Parallel DNA detection by solid-state multi-pore systems and associated methods

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20020072053A1 (en) * 2000-12-08 2002-06-13 Mcnally Alan J. Immunoassay based on DNA replication using labeled primer
US20040091857A1 (en) * 2001-07-20 2004-05-13 Nallur Girish N. Gene expression profiling
US20040185453A1 (en) * 2003-03-21 2004-09-23 Joel Myerson Affinity based methods for separating homologous parental genetic material and uses thereof
US20050009050A1 (en) * 2003-04-18 2005-01-13 James Nadeau Immuno-amplification
US20130059741A1 (en) * 2010-05-13 2013-03-07 Illumina, Inc. Binding assays for markers
US20140030721A1 (en) * 2011-01-31 2014-01-30 Olink Ab Exonuclease Enabled Proximity Extension Assays
US20140194311A1 (en) * 2011-05-24 2014-07-10 Olink Ab Multiplexed Proximity Ligation Assay
US20150111788A1 (en) * 2011-11-22 2015-04-23 Active Motif Multiplex isolation of protein-associated nucleic acids
US20160115474A1 (en) * 2011-11-22 2016-04-28 Active Motif, Inc. Targeted transposition for use in epigenetic studies

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NCBI Accession No. M14144, 01/14/1995, attached *

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11180807B2 (en) 2011-11-04 2021-11-23 Population Bio, Inc. Methods for detecting a genetic variation in attractin-like 1 (ATRNL1) gene in subject with Parkinson's disease
US11174516B2 (en) 2012-02-09 2021-11-16 The Hospital For Sick Children Methods and compositions for screening and treating developmental disorders
US11384397B2 (en) 2013-11-12 2022-07-12 Population Bio, Inc. Methods and compositions for diagnosing, prognosing, and treating endometriosis
US10781477B2 (en) 2016-12-16 2020-09-22 Aratome, LLC Molecular detection using ligation amplification
US10871485B2 (en) 2018-04-13 2020-12-22 Rarecyte, Inc. Kits for labeling of biomarkers and methods of using the same
WO2020092835A1 (en) * 2018-10-31 2020-05-07 Akoya Biosciences, Inc. Methods and kits for detecting cells using oligonucleotide conjugated antibodies
US11492662B2 (en) * 2020-08-06 2022-11-08 Singular Genomics Systems, Inc. Methods for in situ transcriptomics and proteomics
US11643679B2 (en) 2020-08-06 2023-05-09 Singular Genomics Sytems, Inc. Methods for in situ transcriptomics and proteomics
US11891656B2 (en) 2020-08-06 2024-02-06 Singular Genomics Systems, Inc. Methods for in situ transcriptomics and proteomics

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US11926865B2 (en) 2024-03-12
AU2015280326A1 (en) 2017-01-12
US20180105869A1 (en) 2018-04-19
US9909167B2 (en) 2018-03-06
AU2022201480A1 (en) 2022-03-24
JP2021164471A (en) 2021-10-14
US20180119208A1 (en) 2018-05-03
CN106574301B (en) 2021-02-26
US11299770B2 (en) 2022-04-12
US20200063187A1 (en) 2020-02-27
US20180087095A1 (en) 2018-03-29
EP3822362A1 (en) 2021-05-19
CN106574301A (en) 2017-04-19
US10017808B2 (en) 2018-07-10
JP2017520251A (en) 2017-07-27
CN113151396A (en) 2021-07-23
WO2015200139A1 (en) 2015-12-30
JP6910145B2 (en) 2021-07-28
WO2015200139A9 (en) 2016-12-29
AU2015280326B2 (en) 2021-12-09
US20150368697A1 (en) 2015-12-24
US10000796B2 (en) 2018-06-19
US10006082B2 (en) 2018-06-26
EP3158089B1 (en) 2020-10-07
CA2952872A1 (en) 2015-12-30
US10982263B2 (en) 2021-04-20
AU2015280326A9 (en) 2019-08-01
US20190330689A1 (en) 2019-10-31
US20230002809A1 (en) 2023-01-05
EP3158089A1 (en) 2017-04-26
US20240035068A1 (en) 2024-02-01
US20220025444A1 (en) 2022-01-27
EP3158089A4 (en) 2018-01-24
US11634753B2 (en) 2023-04-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11634753B2 (en) On-slide staining by primer extension
US11168350B2 (en) Highly-multiplexed fluorescent imaging

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF THE LELAND STANFORD JUNIO

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:SAMUSIK, NIKOLAY;NOLAN, GARRY P.;GOLTSEV, YURY;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:041489/0560

Effective date: 20170210

AS Assignment

Owner name: THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF THE LELAND STANFORD JUNIO

Free format text: CORRECTIVE ASSIGNMENT TO CORRECT THE ASSIGNEE NAME PREVIOUSLY RECORDED ON REEL 041489 FRAME 0560. ASSIGNOR(S) HEREBY CONFIRMS THE ASSIGNMENT;ASSIGNORS:SAMUSIK, NIKOLAY;NOLAN, GARRY P.;GOLTSEV, YURY;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:042072/0161

Effective date: 20170210

AS Assignment

Owner name: NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (NIH), U.S. DEPT. OF

Free format text: CONFIRMATORY LICENSE;ASSIGNOR:STANFORD UNIVERSITY;REEL/FRAME:045664/0808

Effective date: 20180321

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

AS Assignment

Owner name: INNOVATUS LIFE SCIENCES LENDING FUND I, LP, NEW YO

Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:AKOYA BIOSCIENCES, INC.;REEL/FRAME:050582/0916

Effective date: 20190927

Owner name: INNOVATUS LIFE SCIENCES LENDING FUND I, LP, NEW YORK

Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:AKOYA BIOSCIENCES, INC.;REEL/FRAME:050582/0916

Effective date: 20190927

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION

AS Assignment

Owner name: AKOYA BIOSCIENCES, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY;ASSIGNOR:INNOVATUS LIFE SCIENCES LENDING FUND I, LP;REEL/FRAME:054327/0264

Effective date: 20201023